Table of Contents
General 1
Introduction to MOBY I 2
Configuration and Mounting
Guidelines 3
Mobile Data Memories 4
Read/Write Devices 5
Interfaces 6
Accessories 7
Documentation A
Error Messages B
ASCII Table C
Compatibility D
Published in January, 2007
6GT2 097-4BA00-0EA2
Configuration,
Installation and Service
Manual
MOBYR I
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as
well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the
manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
!Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or
to a particular part of the documentation.
The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual.
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified
persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits,
equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Note the following:
!Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or
the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other
manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
MOBYR, SIMATICR and SINECR are trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the
owner’s rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement
with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agree-
ment. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.
Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
E Siemens AG 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006
Technical data subject to change.
Disclaimer of LiabilityCopyright E Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including
rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model
or design, are reserved.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Special Products, Projects Automotive Industry, Training
P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. 6GT2 097-4BA00-0EA2
Safety Guidelines
Qualified Personnel
Correct Usage
Trademarks
i
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table of Contents
1 General 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Introduction to MOBY I 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Basic Requirements 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Transmission Window 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG and MDS 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Communication between ASM and User Program 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.5 Sample Calculation 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Field Data of MDS and SLG 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 MOBY I Dialog 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Installation Guidelines 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Definition of the Metal-Free Area 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4 Using Side Lobes 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.5 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Carriers 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Configuration with MDS 507 and SLG 44 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Configuring the Presence Check 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Parameterization of the MDS 507 in the Software 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3 Extended Configuration Aids 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.4 Dead Battery Measurement and Changing the Battery for MDS 507 3-48. . . .
3.6.5 Reducing the Sensitivity of the SLG 44 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Configuration with MDS 439 E (Heat-Proof) 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Temperature Dependency of the Transmission Window 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 Temperatures During Cyclic Operation 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3 Life Span of the Mobile Data Memory 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 EMC Guidelines 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.1 Foreword 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2 General 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.3 Spreading of Interference 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.4 Cabinet Layout 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.5 Avoiding Interference Sources 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.6 Equipotential Bonding 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.7 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.8 Shielding the Cables 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.9 Basic Rules on EMC 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 Concept of MOBY Shielding 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.10 Cable and Plug Connector Assignments 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.1 Cable Configuration 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.2 Plug Connector Assignment 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.3 Connection Cables 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.4 Cable Lengths 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Mobile Data Memories 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Introduction 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 MDS 401 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 MDS 402 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 MDS 403 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 MDS 404 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 MDS 506 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 MDS 507 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 MDS 514 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9 MDS 439 E 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Read/Write Devices 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Introduction 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 SLG 40 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 SLG 40-S 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 SLG 41C/SLG 41CC 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 SLG 42 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 SLG 43 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 SLG 44 5-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Interfaces 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Introduction 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 ASM 400/401 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Overview 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Hardware Description 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 ASM 410 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 ASM 450/452 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 ASM 454/424 6-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 ASM 470/475 6-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 ASM 473 6-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 SIM Serial Interface Module 6-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
iii
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7 Accessories 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 MOBY Software 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 MOBY STG I Hand-Held Terminal 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Acquisition Station ES 030-K 7-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Documentation A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Error Messages B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1 General Errors B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 ASM-Related Errors B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250 B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240 B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.4 Error Indication with FC 45 B-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3 Filehandler Error Messages for ASM 401/452/473/475 B-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C ASCII Table C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Compatibility D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
iv MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Figures
2-1 Overview of MOBY I components 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Transmission window 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Working in static operation 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Working in dynamic operation 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Vertical direction of movement 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Horizontal direction of movement 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Tolerances of the height allowance of the pallet 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Dialog setup for MOBY I 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Transmission window during dialog 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 SLG 41 (vertical operation) 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 SLG 42 (vertical operation) 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 SLG 43 (vertical operation) 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13 SLG 44 (data quantity at low speed) 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14 SLG 44 (enlarged section of figure 3-13) 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15 Installation on metal carrier 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16 Flush installation 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17 Mounting the SLG on metal 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18 Mounting the MDS on metal 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19 Interfering metal carriers 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20 Flush installation 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21 Assembly line with MDS 403 reclining or standing (top) and
MDS 404 (bottom) 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22 Sample configuration of tABTAST
: Train with several cars 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23 Diagram of the configuration (drawn to scale) 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24 Coding for tABTAST 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25 Real transmission window between the MDS 507 and the SLG 44 3-41. . . . .
3-26 Main lobe with different operating distances 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27 Main and side lobes with different operating distances 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28 Switch-on window for various receiving capacities 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29 Switch-on window with various angle deviations 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30 Transmission window of the MDS 507 with dead battery 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31 Dead battery measurement with the STG 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32 Dead battery message with SLG 43 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33 Reduction of the receiving capacity of the SLG 44 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34 Opening the cover of the SLG 44 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-35 Soldered jumpers and antenna measuring points on the SLG 44 3-54. . . . . . .
3-36 Label for identification of the hardware status 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-37 Offset factor C in relation to the temperature 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-38 Reduction of field length and limit distance 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-39 Diagram of the temperature progression from table 3-14 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-40 Complete temperature progression during simulation 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-41 Spreading of interference 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-42 The four kinds of interference coupling 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-43 Shielding via housing 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-44 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-45 Filtering the supply voltage 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-46 Suppression of inductive interference 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-47 Equipotential bonding 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48 Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring 3-72. . . . . . . . . .
3-49 SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
v
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3-50 Serial interface SIM with TTY interface 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-51 Shielding of the cables 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52 Connection of the shield rail 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53 Interruption of shielded cables 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54 Simple layout with ASM 400/401 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55 Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield connecting element 3-79. . . . . . . . . . .
3-56 SLG with supplementary power pack 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-57 MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-58 Drawing of mounting the SLG plug connector 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-59 Connection cable: ASM 400/401/424/454, ES 030 ↔ SLG 3-84. . . . . . . . . . .
3-60 Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-61 Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62 Connection cable: ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63 Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 424 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 MDS 401 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Dimensions of MDS 401 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Ways to mount the MDS 401 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Field midpoints of MDS 401 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 MDS 402 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Dimensions of MDS 402 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Field midpoints of MDS 402 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 MDS 403 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Dimensions of MDS 403 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Transmission window of the MDS 403 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Transmission window of the MDS 403 with auxiliary lobes 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 MDS 404 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13 Dimensions of MDS 404 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14 MDS 506 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15 Dimensions of MDS 506 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16 MDS 507 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17 Dimensions of MDS 507 4-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18 MDS 514 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19 Dimensions of MDS 514 4-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20 MDS 439 E 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21 Dimensional drawing of MDS 439 E 4-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22 Holder of the MDS 439 E data memory 4-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23 Assembly of MDS 439 E with holder 4-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24 Metal-free space for MDS 439 E 4-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Read/write device SLG 40 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 View of the antenna 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Metal-free space for SLG 40 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Mounting diagram and dimensions of SLG 40 with mounting clamp 5-5. . . .
5-5 Distance D for SLG 40 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Dimensional diagram of SLG 40 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Read/write device SLG 40-S 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 View of the antenna 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Metal-free space for SLG 40-S 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 Distance D for SLG 40-S 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 Dimensional diagram of SLG 40-S 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Transmission window of SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Metal-free space for SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15 Distance D for SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
vi MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-16 Dimensional diagram of SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17 Read head changes of SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18 SLG 41C/41CC read/write device 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 Transmission window of SLG 41C/41CC 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20 Metal-free area of SLG 41C/41CC 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21 Distance D: SLG 41C/41CC 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22 Dimensions of SLG 41C/41CC 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23 SLG 42 read/write device 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24 Transmission window of SLG 42 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25 Metal-free space for SLG 42 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26 Distance D: SLG 42 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27 Dimensional diagram of SLG 42 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28 Read/write device SLG 43 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29 Transmission window of SLG 43 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30 Metal-free space for SLG 43 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-31 Distance D: SLG 43 5-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32 Dimensional diagram of SLG 43 5-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33 Read/write device SLG 44 5-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34 Transmission window of SLG 44 5-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35 Metal-free space of SLG 44 5-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-36 Distance D: SLG 44 5-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-37 Dimensional diagram of SLG 44 5-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 Configurator of ASM 400/401 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400/401 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400/401 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Settings on the channel module 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U) 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U) 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U) 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U) 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U) 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U) 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11 S5-135U/155U central controller 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 S5-155U/155H central controller 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/155U 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14 S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15 S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16 S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17 Configurator for the ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18 Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21 ASM 450/452 interface 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22 Configurator of ASM 450/452 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23 Connection plug, ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) 6-32. . . . . . .
6-24 Connection cable, ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20) 6-32. . . . . .
6-25 PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power 6-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26 SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 6-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452 6-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28 Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452 6-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29 Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable 6-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30 Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the
terminating resistance 6-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
vii
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6-31 ASM 454/424 interface 6-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32 Configurator for ASM 454/424 6-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG 6-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user 6-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35 Dimensional drawing of ASM 454/424 6-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36 Mounting diagram for the adapter floor plate 6-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37 ASM 470/475 interface 6-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38 Configurator for ASM 470/475 6-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39 Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 6-50. . . . . . . . . . .
6-40 Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) 6-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41 Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable 6-52. . . . . . . . . . .
6-42 ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog 6-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43 ASM 473 interface 6-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44 Configurator for an ASM 473 6-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45 Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X 6-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46 Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473 6-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules. 6-62. . . . . .
6-48 Configurator for SIM 6-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49 SIM serial interface module 6-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50 Flush installation of SIM in metal 6-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51 Transmission window of SIM 6-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52 Dimensions of SIM serial interface module 6-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 MOBY wide-range power pack 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Connection assignment of 24 V output 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 MOBY STG I hand-held terminal 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Hardware of the MOBY STG I hand-held terminal 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Configurator of ES 030-K 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7 Sample configuration of ES 030-K 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
viii MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Tables
2-1 Technical data of MOBY I 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Time constants K and tbyte 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Times for directory operations 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Field data of all MDS and SLG components 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Minimum distance from SLG to SLG in mm (D) 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Definition of terms 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Field data during dialog operation 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Dimensions for flush installation 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Reduction of the field data due to metal. Specifications in % as
related to non-metal 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12 3-33. . . . . . . . .
3-10 Chemical resistance of the MDS 439 E made of polyphenylene sulfide 3-35.
3-11 Actual processing time of an MDS 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 Limit distance Sg for reduced sending field strength 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13 Limit cycles of the temperature for MDS 439 E 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14 Typical temperature profile of an application in a paint shop 3-59. . . . . . . . . . .
3-15 Interference sources: Origin and effects 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16 Causes of coupling paths 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17 Cable configuration 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18 Plug connector assignment of the SLG plug connector 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19 Plug connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D plug connector 3-82.
3-20 Ordering data for the SLG plug connector 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21 Ordering data for MOBY cables 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 Overview table of MDS (replacement parts not included in the table) 4-2. . .
4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS 4-3. . . . . . . .
4-3 Ordering data for MDS 401 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Technical data of MDS 401 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Field data of MDS 401 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Decrease in field data with mounting of the MDS 401 on or in metal 4-5. . . .
4-7 Ordering data for MDS 402 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Technical data of MDS 402 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Field data of MDS 402 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Ordering data for MDS 403 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Technical data of MDS 403 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Field data of MDS 403 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13 Ordering data for MDS 404 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14 Technical data of MDS 404 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15 Field data of MDS 404 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16 Ordering data for MDS 506 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17 Technical data of MDS 506 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18 Field data of MDS 506 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19 Ordering data for MDS 507 4-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20 Technical data of MDS 507 4-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21 Field data of MDS 507 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22 Ordering data for MDS 514 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23 Technical data of MDS 514 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24 Field data of MDS 514 4-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25 Ordering data for MDS 439 E 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26 Technical data of MDS 439 E 4-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27 Field data of MDS 439 E 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28 Limit cycles of MDS 439 E 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
ix
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5-1 Overview table of the SLG 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Ordering data for SLG 40 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Technical data of SLG 40 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Field data of SLG 40 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Ordering data for SLG 40-S 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Technical data of SLG 40-S 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Field data of SLG 40-S 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 Ordering data for SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Technical data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 Field data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 Ordering data of SLG 41C/41CC 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 Technical data of SLG 41C/41CC 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Field data of SLG 41C/41CC 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Ordering data for SLG 42 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15 Technical data of SLG 42 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16 Field data of SLG 42 5-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17 Ordering data for SLG 43 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18 Technical data of SLG 43 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 Field data of SLG 43 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20 Ordering data for SLG 44 5-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21 Technical data of SLG 44 5-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22 Field data of SLG 44 5-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 Overview of the interfaces 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Ordering data for ASM 400/401 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Technical data of ASM 400/401 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Storage capacity of the mobile data memories when the filehandler
is used 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Use of page frame addressing for FB 230 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Ordering data for ASM 410 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Technical data of ASM 410 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Operating modes for ASM 410 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11 Ordering data for ASM 450/452 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Technical data of ASM 450/452 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 LED indication for PROFIBUS diagnosis 6-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14 Ordering data for ASM 454/424 6-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15 Technical data of ASM 454/424 6-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16 Ordering data for ASM 470/475 6-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17 Technical data of ASM 470/475 6-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18 Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475 6-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19 Additional LEDs on the ASM 475 6-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20 Ordering data of ASM 473 6-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21 Technical data of ASM 473 6-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22 Prerequisites for use of ASM 473 6-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23 Ordering data for SIM 6-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24 Technical data of SIM serial interface module 6-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25 Field data of SIM 6-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26 Overview of plug connector assignment for SIM 6-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 Ordering data for MOBY software 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Ordering data of the MOBY wide-range power pack 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Ordering data of the STG I hand-held terminal 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
xMOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7-5 Technical data of the STG I hand-held terminal 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Ordering data for ES 030-K 7-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7 Technical data of ES 030-K 7-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1 General errors B-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2 Error messags of FB 250 B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-4 Error messages of FB 240 B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-5 Error variable error_FC B-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-6 Error variable error_Bus B-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-7 Filehandler error messages B-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1 Compatibility of MDS and SLG types (status: September 2004) D-1. . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
1-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
General
This configuration, installation and service manual will help you to plan and
configure your MOBY I system. It covers the guidelines on configuration
and installation and provides complete technical data on the individual com-
ponents.
The specialists of Technical Support are ready to advise and support you
when you have questions on the functions and handling of our MOBY pro-
ducts.
You can reach us around the clock anywhere in the world.
Telephone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
General news on MOBY I or an overview of our other identification systems
are available on the Internet under the following address.
http://www.siemens.de/moby
Technical support
Internet
1
1-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
General
2-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Introduction to MOBY I
MOBY I is an RF identification system for optimization of material flow and
production processes in the upper performance sector. This high-perfor-
mance, high-capacity, long-distance system permits high data transmission
speeds between data memories (MDS) and read/write devices (SLG).
MOBY I is primarily used when object identification must be inductive (i.e.,
without contact), reliable and fast and production and manufacturing parame-
ters must be carried on the object.
SProcessing manufacturing
(e.g., data memory affixed to the product carrier)
SAssembly
(e.g., data memory affixed to the work piece carrier)
SConveyors
(e.g., data memory on suspended rails)
STransportation
Table 2-1 Technical data of MOBY I
Storage capacity 8 kbytes to 32 kbytes
Memory type RAM, EEPROM and FRAM
Data organization File or address-oriented
Protection rating IP65 to IP68
Operating temperature –25 to +70/85°C, 200°C (cyclic)
Data transmission speed (SLG - MDS) w 0.8 msec/byte
Read/write distance 0 to 1000 mm
Can be connected to SIMATIC S5/7, PCs, computers, PLCs of
other manufacturers, and PROFIBUS
SMDS (mobile data memory)
SSLG (read/write device)
SASM (interface module)
SSTG (service and test device)
Principal applica-
tion areas
Technical data of
MOBY I
Overview of
MOBY I
components
2
2-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
ASM 400/401
For SIMATIC
S115U
S135U
S155U/H
SFB 250/230
ASM 410
For SIMATIC
S90U
S95U
S100U/H
SET 100/200
SFB 41
ASM 450/452
For
SPROFIBUS DP
SFB 240/FC 44/
FC 46/FC 56 for
SIMATIC S5/S7
ASM 470/475
For SIMATIC
SS7-300 with
FC 47/FC 45/
FC 56
SET 200M with
FB 47/FC 47/
FC 45/FC 56
SLG 41C
SLG 41CC
SIM 41
SIM 42
SIM 43
PC/Controller
of other
manufacturer
SIMs operated
directly on the
serial inteface
Internal system interface/max. cable length of 1000 m
Inductive power/data transmission (1.81 MHz/134 kHz)
RS 232 / RS 422 / TTY
ASM 424
For connection to:
SPC
SController
of other
manufacturer
SComputer
SINUMERIK via
serial interface
ASM 454
For
SPROFIBUS DPV1
connection with
FC 45 for
SIMATIC S7
SLG 42
ASM 473
Fits ET 200X;
Control via
PROFIBUS
DPV1 with
FC 45/FC 56
RF170C
For
SPROFIBUS DP/
DPV1
SPROFIBUS IO
SFC 45/FC 55/
FC 56
ASM 456
For
SPROFIBUS DP/
DPV1
SFC 45
X1
X2
ASM = Interface module
MDS 401
8-Kbyte FRAM
MDS 402
8-Kbyte FRAM
MDS 403
8-Kbyte FRAM
MDS 514
32-Kbyte RAM/FRAM
MDS 404
8-Kbyte FRAM
MDS 506
32-Kbyte RAM/FRAM
MDS 439 E
8-Kbyte EEPROM
200 °C cyclically
MDS 507
32-Kbyte RAM/
Range of 1 m
MDS = Mobile data memory
SLG 41
SLG 41-S
SLG 43
SLG 44
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG = Read/
write device
Figure 2-1 Overview of MOBY I components
Introduction to MOBY I
3-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3
3-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.1 Basic Requirements
!Warning
Do not make changes to the devices.
Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (BZT, FCC), CE
and the manufacturer’s warranty.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note
Any unauthorized changes and modifications to this device could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
To choose the correct MOBY I components, apply the following criteria to
your particular application.
STransmission distance (i.e., read/write distance)
SThe amount of data to be transferred
SMetal-free spaces for MDS and SLG
SStatic or dynamic transmission of the data
SSpeed for dynamic transmission
STolerances of the tracking
SEnvironmental conditions (e.g., moisture, temperature, chemical in-
fluences and so on)
FCC Compliance
Statement
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-3
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.1.1 Transmission Window
The read/write device (i.e., SLG) generates an inductive alternating field.
The field is strongest in the vicinity of the SLG and decreases in strength the
greater the distance from the SLG. Distribution of the field depends on the
layout and geometry of the antennas on the SLG and the MDS.
MDS functionality requires a minimum field strength on the MDS achieved
at a distance of Sg from the SLG. The figure below shows the transmission
window between the MDS and the SLG.
MM
Sa
Sg
View of the side
MM
L
Max. transmission window at approx. 1/2 Sa
Transmission window at Sa
(The somewhat shorter field length for Sa has
already been included in the calculation formula
in chap. 3.1.2)
View of the top
MDS
M: Midpoint of the transmission window
Sa: Operating distance
Sg: Limit distance (The limit distance is the maximum clearance between the top of the
SLG and the top of the MDS at which the transmission will still function under nor-
mal conditions.)
L: Length of a transmission window for vertical direction of movement of the MDS
2L: Length of a transmission window for horizontal direction of movement of the MDS
Remember that a transmission hole (ÜL) exists in the middle of the window. When
an MDS stops there, it cannot be processed.
ÜL: The transmission gap is located between the two transmission windows. Pro-
cessing with the MDS in this area is not possible. The transmission gap is several
millimeters in length. ÜL will be disregarded in the rest of this chapter
(i.e., ÜL = 0 mm).
SLG
SLG
L
2L
2L
ÜL
L
Figure 3-1 Transmission window
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The shape of the active field corresponds to two symmetrically positioned
circles (cf. view of top). The strength of the field drops (i.e., transmission
gap) in the area of the symmetry axis of the SLG. The direction of movement
and rotation of the MDS can be disregarded
(exception: MDS 402, 403 and 507).
The above figure also shows that operation in the area between Sa and Sg is
possible. The greater the distance, the smaller the active working area be-
comes until it is reduced to one point at distance Sg. For this reason, only
static operation should be used in the area between Sa and Sg.
Moving the MDS over both transmission windows produces an active length
of 2L. 2L can be substituted for L in the formula for the transmit period (see
chap. 3.1.2). In actual practice, a precisely doubled transmit period does not
occur (see chap. 3.2). The following points must be considered when config-
uring the system.
Note
Data transmission can be briefly interrupted in the area of the symmetry axis
of the SLG. This interruption is transparent for the user. Execution of the
interrupted command is automatically continued as soon as the MDS arrives
in the second active area. The duration of the interruption can be any length
of time. This is the case when the MDS stops prcisely on the symmetry axis.
The user can determine this with the presence signal (i.e., ANW) which can
disappear in the transmission gap. The presence signal can be scanned by the
user. This signal shows whether an MDS is currently located in one of the
two transmission windows.
The greatest operating distance (Sg) is achieved vertically over the midpoint
(M) of the transmission window. Figure 3-2 illustrates this distance at which
transmission is still possible.
M
1/2 L
SLG
MDS
Sg
Transmission
window
Figure 3-2 Working in static operation
The optimum distance between the two symmetry axes is 1/2L. The “trans-
mission gap” in the middle of the SLG can be disregarded.
Working in static
operation
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-5
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
MDS
SLG
Horizontal
Vertical
MM
MDS
Transmission window
Figure 3-3 Working in dynamic operation
The following approximation formula applies to practical applications.
B+0.4 @L
B: Width of the transmission window
L: Length of the transmission window
The width of the transmission window (B) is particularly important for the
tolerance of mechanical tracking. When B is maintained, the formula can be
used without restriction for the transmit period. The active area can be repre-
sented as shown below.
L
B
Direction of movement of the MDS
M
Figure 3-4 Vertical direction of movement
This direction of movement does not produce a “gap” in data transmission.
The presence signal (i.e., ANW) precisely indicates the presence of an MDS.
This direction of movement is always recommended when the configuration
permits.
Working in dyna-
mic operation
Width of the trans-
mission window
Vertical direction
of movement
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
BDirection of move-
ment of the MDS
M M
2L
Figure 3-5 Horizontal direction of movement
This direction of movement should only be used when the simple field length
(L) is not sufficient for transmission during dynamic operation. The use of
the presence check or the evaluation of this signal for control purposes is not
recommended in this operation mode. When located in the data transmission
“gap” at the symmetry axis, the presence signal could cause control errors in
the user program.
The transmission window of the MDS 403 is described in chap. 4.4.
The transmission window of the MDS 507 is described in chap. 3.6.
Horizontal direc-
tion of movement
Transmission
window of the
MDS 403
Transmission
window of the
MDS 507
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-7
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS
The transmit period is the time during which the MDS is located in the trans-
mission window of an SLG. During this time, the SLG can exchange data
with the MDS.
The formula used to calculate the transmit period is shown below.
tV+L@0.8Ă[m]
VMDSĂƪmńsƫ
tV: Transmit period of the MDS
L: Length of the transmission window (cf. table 3-3)
VMDS: Speed of the data memory in dynamic operation
0.8: Constant factor. Compensates for temperature influences and pro-
duction tolerances.
During static operation, the transmit period can be any length of time. The
transmit period must last at least as long as necessary to conclude commu-
nication with the MDS.
During dynamic operation, the transmit period is determined by the system
environment. The amount of data to be transferred must be adjusted to the
transmit period or vice versa.
General formula:
tVwtK
tV :Transmit period of the data memory in the field of the SLG
tK: Communication time between MDS and ASM
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG and MDS
Communication between ASM, SLG and MDS is asynchronous with a trans-
mission speed of 19200 baud.
General formula:
tK+K)tByte @n1
Calculation of the maximum amount of user data:
nmax +tV-K
tByte
tK: Communication time between ASM, SLG and MDS
tV: Transmit period
n: Amount of user data in bytes
nmax: Maximum amount of user data in bytes during dynamic operation
tbyte: Transmission time for 1 byte (cf. table 3-1)
K: Constant. The constant represents an internal system time. It con-
tains the time required for power buildup on the MDS and the time
required for command transmission (cf. table 3-1).
1 The tK calculation applies to interference-free transmission. When
transmission is briefly interrupted due to external interference, the
ASM continues the command automatically.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-9
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 3-1 Time constants K and tbyte
Constant K [msec] tByte
[]
Data Memory Operating
Md
MDS 507 All Other
MDSs
y
[msec] Memory
Type
Memory
Size
Ope-
ra-
tion2
Mode
66
66
66
16
16
16
0.8
0.8
3.8
RAM/FRAM
EEPROM
EEPROM
All
8 Kbytes
8 Kbytes
R/W
R
W
Normal
operation
883
883
1073
1903
383
383
573
1403
1.4
1.4
1.4
4.4
RAM/FRAM
EEPROM
RAM/FRAM
EEPROM
All
8 Kbytes
All
8 Kbytes
R
R
W
W
ECC-
operation4
110
190
190
60
140
140
1
1.4
3.8
RAM/FRAM
EEPROM
EEPROM
All
8 Kbytes
8 Kbytes
R/W
R
W
Filehandler
190
190
270
330
140
140
220
280
2.6
3.0
3.5
8.6
RAM/FRAM
RAM/FRAM
EEPROM
EEPROM
All
All
8 Kbytes
8 Kbytes
R
W
R
W
Filehandler
with ECC4
2 Operation: R = Read, W = Write
3 Worst-case values. Usually not reached.
4 ECC operation: The above table does not contain the ASM computing times for error
correction of data when MDS is defective. Net capacity of the MDS is reduced.
This table applies to all commands. When a user command consists of sev-
eral subcommands, the formula for tK must be applied to each subcommand.
When the MDS 507 is used, an additional 50 msec is added to K. This time
is required to activate the switch-on logic of the MDS 507.
The MDS 507 automatically switches off immediately after each command.
tAUS is the time between the last communication with the MDS and its
switch-off.
tAUS [6Ămsec
Special features
of the MDS 507
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
If the MDS is processed with an additional command after switch-off, it re-
quires another switch-on time of K = 50 msec until the command can be exe-
cuted. MDS switch-off can be avoided by using the permanent presence
check (tABTAST = 0). Remember, however, that continuous use of the pres-
ence check puts a heavy strain on the dialog battery of the MDS 507.
!Caution
If an MDS 507 is subject to strong interference during and after processing,
the MDS may not switch off since the dialog battery may have gone dead.
Such fields of interference can be caused by incorrectly wired frequency
converters or defective motor controllers, for example.
Brief interference pulses at intervals of t > 20 msec will not cause the MDS
to malfunction.
SThe time constant K already contains a read and write operation which
the filehandler automatically executes when a new MDS arrives.
SRead and write operations of the directory and the file allocation table
(i.e., FAT) are not included in the above table. These operations are re-
quired when something has been changed in the directory area.
Examples:
– MDS with altered data structure enters the field.
– Files are written with data for the first time.
– New files are created with “create.”
SThe following times (in msec) apply to directory operations.
Table 3-2 Times for directory operations
8-Kbyte
EEPROM
32-Kbyte
RAM/FRAM
8-Kbyte
RAM/FRAM
With-
out ECC
With
ECC
With-
out ECC
With
ECC
With-out
ECC
With
ECC
Read directory + FAT 580 950 940 1600 580 950
Write directory entry 1300 310 330 400 220 270
Write directory entry + FAT 11190 1260 540 750 410 600
1 These time include the calculation of the checksum of DIR + FAT.
Times: 8 KB = 160 msec
32 KB = 270 msec
Remarks on the
operation mode
with filehandler
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-11
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.1.4 Communication between ASM and User Program
The time required for communication between ASM and user depends on the
following factors.
SCycle time and type of programmable controller
SSoftware used
– Normal mode: FB 41, FB 250, FC 47, FB 47, FB 240,
FC 44, FC 45
– Filehandler: FB 230, FC 46, FB 246, FC 56
Communication between the ASM 400 and the user can be divided into three
steps.
a) The user issues a command and starts it. When the FB is called the next
time, the command is transferred to the ASM and is acknowledged by the
ASM.
b) The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user or the FBs are
in wait status. Data communication with the MDS starts as soon as an
MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are
stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness.
c) Communication of the ASM with the MDS has been concluded. When
the FB is called the next time, the read data or the results of a write
command are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives
a finished message.
See applicable documentation for the exact communication times
between ASM and user.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-12 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.1.5 Sample Calculation
A conveyor system moves the pallets with the MDS at a maximum speed of
VMDS = 2 m/sec. The direction of movement is vertical. The following
MOBY I components were selected.
SASM 400 (with FB 250)
SSLG 42
SMDS 514
Task:
a) Physical specifications are to be provided to the constructor of the plant.
b) The maximum number of bytes in dynamic operation is to be provided to
the programmer.
For technical data of the components, see the tables in chapter 3.2 (“field
data of MDS and SLG”).
H
Direction of movement
0 < H < Sa
(View of the side)
MDS
SLG
0 < H < 30 mm
Figure 3-6 Tolerances of the height allowance of the pallet
The customer
application
Tolerance of the
height allowance
of the pallet
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-13
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
X1
Symmetry axis
of the SLG
SLG
Middle line of the MDS allowance
Tolerance range of the side allowance
Direction of movement of the MDS
X2
B
Figure 3-7 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet
L: Length of the transmission window
B: Width of the transmission window
[X1, X2]:Distance of the symmetry axes between MDS and SLG including
tolerance range
x1+1
2L*1
2B+45Ămm *18Ămmąx1+27Ămm
x2+1
2L)1
2B+45Ămm )18Ămmąx2+63Ămm
See table 3-4 for this value.
Du800Ămm
See table 3-3 for this value.
Du250Ămm
Tolerances of the
side allowance of
the pallet
Minimum distance
between SLG and
SLG
Minimum distance
between MDS and
MDS
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
tV+L@0.8
VMDS +0.09Ăm@0.8
2Ămsec +0.036Ăs+36Ămsec
For normal operating mode, see table in chap. 3.1.3 for the values of K and
tbyte.
K = 16 msec ; tbyte = 0.8 msec
Calculation of nmax
nmax +tV*K
tbyte +36Ămsec *16Ămsec
0.8Ămsec +25ąnmax +25Ăbytes
Up to 25 bytes can be read while the MDS is passing by in vertical operation.
Maximum number
of bytes
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-15
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.2 Field Data of MDS and SLG
The table below shows the field data of all MOBY I MDS and SLG compo-
nents. This makes selecting an MDS and an SLG particularly easy.
The technical data represent average data and are valid for an ambient tem-
perature of 0 to 50 C, a supply voltage of 22 V to 27 V DC, and metal-free
surroundings. Tolerances of " 20% are permitted for production conditions
and temperature fluctuations.
Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range
from 20 V to 30 V DC is utilized for the SLG, and/or the entire temperature
range is utilized for MDS and SLG.
Table 3-3 Field data of all MDS and SLG components
MDS
SLG
MDS 514
MDS 404
MDS 506 MDS 439 E MDS 401
MDS 402
MDS 403 MDS 507
Length of the Transmission Window in mm (L)
L 2L L 2L L 2L L 2L L1L1
SLG 40 –––––– Ld = 182– –
SLG 40-S –––––– Ld = 92– –
SLG 41336 72 – – – – 30 50 65 –
SLG 41C 30 60 – – – – 20 40 65 –
SLG 42 90 180 120 190 120 210 – – 110 –
SLG 43 140 260 220 400 190 330 – – – –
SLG 44 – – – – – – – – – 1200
SIM 4x 60 80 85 100 75 100 – – 80 –
Width of the Transmission Window in mm (B)
SLG 40 – – – Ld = 182– –
SLG 40-S ––– Ld = 92– –
SLG 41315 – – 12 25 –
SLG 41C 12 – – 8 25 –
SLG 42 36 48 48 – 50 –
SLG 43 60 88 76 – – –
SLG 44 – – – – – 300
SIM 4x 20 30 30 – 45 –
Operating Distance in mm (Sa)
SLG 40 –––2 to 8 – –
SLG 40-S –––2 to 6 – –
SLG 4130 to 12 – – 0 to 6 4 to 15 –
SLG 41C 0 to 12 – – 0 to 6 4 to 15 –
SLG 42 0 to 30 10 to 35 10 to 55 –10 to 30 –
SLG 43 0 to 50 20 to 100 20 to 80 – – –
SLG 44 – – – – – 100 to 800
SIM 4x 0 to 20 0 to 25 0 to 25 –0 to 25 –
1Caution: The MDS 507 and MDS 403 must be positioned based on the direction. The geometry of the transmission
window differs from the other MDSs. Cf. chap. 3.6 or 4.4.
2L
d: Due to the special characteristics of the antenna of the MDS 402/401, a round transmission window is produced
when used with the SLG 40. In static operation, a maximum median deviation Lm of " 9 mm is permitted.
3 Also applies to the SLG 41-S
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-16 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 3-3 Field data of all MDS and SLG components
MDS 507MDS 403MDS 401
MDS 402
MDS 439 EMDS 506MDS 514
MDS 404
MDS
SLG
Limit distance in mm (Sg)
SLG 40 - - - 10 - -
SLG 40-S --- 8 - -
SLG 41325 - - 10 30 -
SLG 41C 25 - - 10 30 -
SLG 42 60 70 70 - 80 -
SLG 43 90 150 125 - - -
SLG 44 - - - - - 1000
SIM 4x 33 40 33 - 40 -
Distance from MDS to MDS in mm (D1)
SLG 40 ---> 50 - -
SLG 40-S --- > 50 - -
SLG 413> 90 - - > 80 > 120 -
SLG 41C > 90 - - > 80 > 120 -
SLG 42 > 250 > 300 > 500 -> 200 -
SLG 43 > 500 > 600 > 600 - - -
SLG 44 - - - - - > 4000
SIM 4x > 200 > 300 > 300 -> 200 -
3Also applies to the SLG 41-S
Table 3-4 Minimum distance from SLG to SLG in mm (D)
SLG
SLG
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 41
SLG 41-S
SLG 41C
SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 SIM 4x
SLG 40/40-S > 50/80 - - - - -
SLG 41/41-S/41C -> 200 > 800 > 2000 > 6000 > 700
SLG 42 -> 800 > 800 > 2000 > 6000 > 800
SLG 43 -> 2000 > 2000 > 2000 > 6000 > 2000
SLG 44 -> 6000 > 6000 > 6000 > 6000 > 6000
SIM 4x -> 700 > 800 > 2000 > 6000 > 700
Note
Adherence to the values specified in table 3-4 is essential. There is a danger
of affecting inductive fields if the values are underranged. This would in-
crease the time for data transmission incalculably or a command would be
terminated with errors.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-17
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.3 MOBY I Dialog
During the MOBY I dialog, one ASM exchanges data with another ASM
while both SLGs are in the transmission window. When parameterizing the
two ASMs, always make sure that one ASM uses normal mode (station_N)
and the other uses dialog mode (station_D).
As soon as the ASM for dialog mode is parameterized as such, a memory
area is created there called VMDS (see figure 3-8). The VMDS is then used
for communication memory. Its setup is like a dual port RAM. Station_N and
station_D can be read and write accessed in the same way on the VMDS.
Station_D supplies data to the VMDS (write access). These data are read by
station_N as soon as both SLGs meet.
Figure 3-8 shows the setup of dialog communication with MOBY I.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Station_N reads/writes the
SLG_N SLG_D
VMDS via clearance in air
MOBY I interface in dialog
operation
(e.g., ASM 470 in SIMATIC S7)
Ò
Ò
Ò
Ò
MOBY I interface in
normal operation
(e.g., ASM 400 in
SIMATIC S5)
Read or write
the VMDS with
FB 250
Station_D
Station_N
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
VMDS Read/write/
initialize the
VMDS with
FC 47
Figure 3-8 Dialog setup for MOBY I
How it works
Dialog setup
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-18 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 3-5 Definition of terms
Designation Explanation
Station_N Normal ASM of MOBY I (all MOBY ASMs as per chap. 6)
Station_N is used by the user in the normal manner (i.e., as if the user
wanted to exchange data with an MDS).
SLG_N An SLG (SLG 41, SLG 42, SLG 43 and SLG 44) which is connected
to station_N
Station_D Dialog ASM of MOBY I (ASM 400, ASM 410 and ASM 470)
When switched on by a user command, station_D is parameterized as
the dialog ASM. During parameterization, a 16-Kbyte memory area is
defined on station_D. This memory is called the VMDS (i.e., virtual
MDS). It is used for communication storage. Processing of station_D
by the user is identical to the program in station_N. Station_D uses
the same tools as station_N (e.g., FC 47).
SLG_D An SLG (SLG 41, SLG 42, SLG 43 and SLG 44) which is connected
to station_D
VMDS Virtual mobile data memory = VMDS. The VMDS is a 16-Kbyte
memory area (ASM 452 = 1280 bytes) on station_D. When station_D
is turned on and parameterized, the VMDS is defined and cleared.
When configuring the communication time, the same times apply as descri-
bed in chap. 3.1.3.
tk+16Ămsec)0.8Ămsec @nbyte
Communication
time during dialog
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-19
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The transmission window from SLG_D to SLG_N has a polarization direc-
tion (i.e., SLG_D and SLG_N must be directed towards each other at certain
angles). Figure 3-9 shows the transmission window during dialog.
Sa
Sg
View of the side
View of the top
SLG_D
SLG_N
Direction of move-
ment of SLG_D to
SLG_N
sa = Operating distance
sg = Limit distance
L = Length of the transmission window
B = Width of the transmission window
Positioning of SLG_D
(tolerance)
Transmission window
Enlargement of the transmission window
when SLG_D and SLG_N are working
at a minimum operating distance
L
B
Figure 3-9 Transmission window during dialog
Table 3-6 shows the field data during dialog operation. Dimensions are given
in millimeters.
Table 3-6 Field data during dialog operation
All dimensions in mm SLG 41-
SLG 41
SLG 42-
SLG 42
SLG 43-
SLG 43
SLG 44-
SLG 44
Length of the transmission win-
dow (L)
60 230 600 3000
Width of the transmission win-
dow (B)
30 80 280 1300
Operating distance (sa)0 to 15 0 to 70 20 to 250 200 to 1000
Limit distance (sg) 30 130 450 2500
Distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 200 > 800 > 2000 > 10000
Transmission win-
dow during dialog
Field data during
dialog operation
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.4 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data
The curves shown here will simplify selection of MOBY I MDS and SLG
components for dynamic operation. Information from the table in chapter
3.1.3 was used to calculate the curves. The curves apply to vertical operation
with a single length of the transmission window (L).
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 102030405060708090
MDS 514 / MDS 404 (Read/Write)
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
1,66
1,33
1
0,66
0,33
0
MDS 403 (Read/Write)
Figure 3-10 SLG 41 (vertical operation)
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
0 102030405060708090
MDS 514 / MDS 404 (Read/Write)
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
MDS 506 (Read/Write)
MDS 403 (Read/Write)
Figure 3-11 SLG 42 (vertical operation)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-21
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270
MDS 514/MDS 404 (Read/Write)
V MDS
(m/s) (m/min)
Number of
bytes (n)
MDS 506 (Read/Write)
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
Figure 3-12 SLG 43 (vertical operation)
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
V MDS
(km/h) (m/s)
Number of
bytes (n)
43.2
36
28.8
14.4
7.2
0
21.6
50.4
57.6
MDS 507 (Read/Write)
Figure 3-13 SLG 44 (data quantity at low speed)
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
0 1020304050
V MDS
(km/h) (m/s)
Number of bytes (n)
43.2
36
28.8
14.4
7,2
0
21.6
50.4
57.6
MDS 507 (Read/Write)
Figure 3-14 SLG 44 (enlarged section of figure 3-13)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-22 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.5 Installation Guidelines
The MDS and SLG are devices which work with induction. Every type of
metal, particularly iron and ferromagnetic materials, in the vicinity of these
devices influences their field geometry. To ensure that the field data de-
scribed in chapter 3.2 retain their validity, several points must be adhered to
when configuring and installing the devices.
SMinimum distance between two read/write devices. See data sheets of
the SLG.
SMinimum distance between two adjacent data memories. See data sheets
of the MDS.
SMetal-free area with flush installation of SLG and MDS in metal
SInstallation of several SLGs in metal frames or carriers
The next few chapters describe how installation in metallic surroundings af-
fects the identification system.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-23
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.5.1 Definition of the Metal-Free Area
When an MDS or SLG is mounted directly on metal, no attention must
usually be paid to additional metal-free areas. The physical height of the
MDS/SLG housing ensures a sufficient distance between the antenna and the
metal.
However, the technical characteristics Sg, Sa and L can be reduced by up to
50% when the MDS is mounted on metal objects whose dimensions are
greater than those of the MDS.
Although the formula for the transmit period (see chapter 3.1.2) includes a
constant factor for such effects, you should counteract a reduction of the
transmission window when critical applications are involved.
The following solutions are open to you.
SInstallation on plastic holder (see figure 3-15)
SInstallation of MDS at a 8 to 20-mm distance from the metal (e.g., plastic
washer)
SKeep the metal plate for the holder as small as possible
Metal
Non-metal
Figure 3-15 Installation on metal carrier
Installation on
metal carriers
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-24 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Flush installation of MDS and SLG in metal is also permitted. However,
minimum distances between the edge of the housing and the metal must be
maintained.
Metal
b
a
b
a
h
a, b: Metal-free distances
h: Physical height of MDS
or SLG = height of the me-
tal-free area
Figure 3-16 Flush installation
Table 3-7 Dimensions for flush installation
Dimensions in mm a b h
MDS 404/514 10 10 20
MDS 402 10/0* 10 15
MDS 403 10 10 15
MDS 401 10/0* – 9
MDS 506 40 40 40/60**
MDS 507 40 40 40
MDS 439 E 40 40 60
SLG 40/40-S 10 – 10
SLG 41/41-S 25 25 40
SLG 41C 20 20 30
SLG 42 30 30 40
SLG 43 >50 >30 40/60**
SLG 44 80 40 40/60**
SIM 4x 30 30 40
* See MDS description in chap. 4
** Recommended value
Flush installation
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-25
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.5.2 Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window
As already described in chapter 3.5.1, installation on metal can reduce the
size of the transmission window. The midpoint is shifted to the middle of the
SLG.
The figures below illustrate this point.
In figure 3-17, a 30 x 30-cm iron plate is used as the mounting plate. The
surroundings of the MDS are free of metal.
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
M
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
M
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
M
M
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
M
M
SLG 41
with MDS 514:
SLG 42
with MDS 514:
SLG 43
with MDS 506:
Sa = 12 mm Sa = 30 mm Sa = 80 mm
Normal size of the transmission window
Transmission window after mounting the SLG on metal
Transmission window after mounting the SLG at a 20-mm distance to metal (as recommended in the
catalog)
When SLG 41 is
mounted on metal, virtu-
ally no reduction of the
transmission window
can be detected.
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
When SLG 42 and SLG 43 are
mounted at a 20-mm distance to
the metal, the transmission win-
dow achieves the normal size.
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
= 100%
= 100%
= 90%
= 100%
= 100%
= 90%
= 100%
= 100%
= 98%
Effects of field length L:
20 mm
45 mm
115 mm
Figure 3-17 Mounting the SLG on metal
Installation of the
SLG on metal
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-26 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
In figure 3-18, a 30 x 30-cm iron plate is used as the mounting plate. The
SLG is operated in a metal-free environment.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
M
M
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
M
M
SLG 41
with MDS 514: SLG 42
with MDS 514:
SLG 43
with MDS 506:
Sa = 12 mm Sa = 30 mm Sa = 80 mm
Normal size of the transmission window
Transmission window after mounting the MDS on metal
Transmission window after mounting the MDS at a 20-mm distance to metal
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
M
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
M
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ËËËËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
= 100%
= 90%
= 75%
= 100%
= 96%
= 80%
= 100%
= 95%
= 85%
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈ
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈ
Effects of field length L:
20 mm
33 mm 145 mm
115 mm
100 mm 1
1 When the MDS (or MDS and SLG) is mounted directly on metal, the midpoint of the field is shifted to
the value shown.
Figure 3-18 Mounting the MDS on metal
Mounting the MDS
on metal
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-27
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 3-8 provides a summary of the figures shown on the preceding pages in
tabulated format. Details describing the effect of various metals on the SLG
and MDS have been added.
Table 3-8 Reduction of the field data due to metal. Specifications in % as related to non-metal
Sg, Sa, L, B [%] SLG 41 / MDS 514 SLG 42 / MDS 514 SLG 43 / MDS 506
Mounted on metal SLG MDS SLG
+MDS
SLG MDS SLG
+MDS
SLG MDS SLG
+MDS
Reference non-metal 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Iron Direct 100 80 75 75 75 50 65 85 50
20 mm
distance
100 95 90 95 100 85 95 90 95
Alumi- Direct 100 80 75 65 80 55 65 85 50
num 20 mm
distance
100 95 95 95 100 90 95 95 95
Copper Direct 100 75 80 75 85 65 75 75 50
20 mm
distance
100 100 95 100 95 95 100 90 90
SThe table applies to a 30 x 30-cm metal plate. Reduction of the metal
plate to a minimum size will improve the field data.
SFlush installation of components in metal reduces the field data further.
A test is recommended when critical mounting configurations are in-
volved.
SWhen working in one of the two transmission windows, it must be en-
sured that no metal rail (or similar) is located in the second transmission
window. The metal rail would also reduce the limit distance or the field
length.
SRemember that metal will shift the midpoint of the field to the middle of
the SLG.
SDistances of 40 mm or more to metal have virtually no more effect on the
field.
Effects of various
metals on the field
data
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-28 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.5.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Sa
MDS
MDS
Metal carrier Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal
Bad
A metal carrier is located over
the second transmission win-
dow of the SLG. This carrier af-
fects the entire field. Particu-
larly the transmission window
between SLG and MDS is re-
duced.
Metal
Good
The transmission window is
no longer affected when the
SLG is mounted differently.
Figure 3-19 Interfering metal carriers
Interfering metal
carriers
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-29
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Metal
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
10-30 mm x > 70 mm
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
Metal
Enlargement of the non-metal-
lic spacer under the MDS and/
or SLG. MDS and/or SLG are
10 to 30 mm higher than the
metallic surroundings.
The value x > 70 mm applies
to the SLG 42 and SLG 43.
This value specifies that, at a
distance of x > 70 mm, the
SLG is no longer noticeably
affected by the metal.
Enlargement of non-metallic
distances a and b
The following rules of thumb
apply.
SSelect a and b increased
with a factor of 2 to 3
SFor SLG/MDS with large
limit distance (SLG
43/MDS 506), enlargement
of a and b has more effect
than for SLG/MDS with
small limit distance.
SThis measure is not neces-
sary for SLG 44/MDS 507.
Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal
Although flush installation of
MDS and SLG is generally pos-
sible, the size of the transmis-
sion window is sharply reduced.
The following measures can be
used to counteract reduction of
the window.
Figure 3-20 Flush installation
Flush installation
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-30 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Every SLG which is mounted on metal couples part of the field on the metal
carrier. When minimum distance D is maintained and metal-free areas a and
b are adhered to, there are usually no effects. However, when the location of
an iron frame is particularly poor, there may be some effects. This will leng-
then data transmission times or causes sporadic error messages on the inter-
face.
This point is particularly important when a long-range SLG is used (i.e., SLG
43/44).
a) Using the service and test device and the “HELP” key + “A,” the pre-
sence of an inductive interference field can be proven. An LED on the
SLG 44 indicates the presence of such a field of interference.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
SLG A SLG B
STG
D
Only SLG A is active. In the vicinity of SLG B, the field is measured on
the metal carrier. When an interference field appears on the display, the
following measures can be used to correct the situation.
b) Lengthen distance D between the two SLGs
c) Turn one or both SLGs by 90°. This rotates the inductive fields so that
they can no longer affect each other.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
SLG A
SLG B is rotated by 90°.
D
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Installation of se-
veral SLGs on me-
tal frame or carrier
Necessary actions
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-31
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
!Caution
Turning the SLG alters the physical mounting of the MDS.
d) Install one or more iron struts to short circuit the parasitic fields
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
SLG A SLG B
e) Install a non-metallic spacer of 20 to 40 mm in thickness between the
SLG and the iron frame. This significantly reduces parasitic coupling of
the field on the carrier.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Non-metallic spacer
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-32 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.5.4 Using Side Lobes
In addition to the arrangement of MDS and SLG as described in chapter 3.1,
other arrangements within the transmission window are possible. With some
applications (e.g., assembly lines), this can help simplify a plant.
The following example shows how an MDS is processed from two different
sides.
Pallet
MDS 403
Reclining
SLG 41
Transmission window
via side lobes
SLG 41
Normal transmission window
(use of width B of the transmission window)
Pallet
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Pallet
MDS 404
SLG 41
Transmission window
via side lobe
SLG 41
Normal transmission window
Pallet
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Conveyor
technology
Conveyor
technology
SLG 41-S
Transmission window via side lobe
SLG 41-S
Normal transmission
window
MDS 403
Standing
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Figure 3-21 Assembly line with MDS 403 reclining or standing (top) and
MDS 404 (bottom)
The size of the side lobes can as large as the normal transmission window.
However, remember that a metallic environment greatly affects the size and
location of the side lobes. We recommend determining the side lobes with a
test setup in an actual environment (e.g., pallet).
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-33
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.5.5 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Carriers
Table 3-9 provides an overview of chemical resistance of data memories
made of polyamide 12. It should be emphasized that the plastic housing is
very resistant to chemicals found in the automotive sector (e.g., oils, grease,
diesel fuel, gasoline and so on) which are not listed separately here.
Table 3-9 Chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12
Concentration 20° C 60° C
Battery acid 30 F j
Ammonia, gaseous J J
Ammonia, w. Conc. J J
10 J J
Benzine J Y
Bleaching lye (12.5% chlorine solution) F j
Butane, gaseous, liquid J J
Butyl acetate (acetic acid butylester) J J
n-butyl alcohol (n-butanol) J Y
Calcium chloride, w. J Y
Calcium nitrate, w. k.g. J Y
Chorine j j
Chrome baths, tech. j j
Ferrous salts, w. k.g. J J
Acetic acid, w. 50 j j
Ethyl alcohol, undenatured 96 J Y
50 J J
Formaldehyde, w. 30 Y j
10 J Y
Formalin Y j
Glycerin J J
Isopropanol J Y
Caustic potash solution, w. 50 J J
Lysol F j
Magnesium salts, w. k.g. J J
Methyl alcohol, w. 50 J J
Lactic acid, w. 50 F j
10 Y F
Sodium carbonate, w. (soda) k.g. J J
Polyamide
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-34 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 3-9 Chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12
60° C20° CConcentration
Sodium chloride, w. k.g. J J
Sodium hydroxide J J
Blue salts, w. k.g. J J
Nitrobenzene Y F
Phosphoric acid 10 f V
Propane J J
Mercury J J
Nitric acid 10 f j
Hydrochloric acid 10 f j
Sulfur dioxide Slight J J
Sulfuric acid 25 F j
10 Y j
Hydrogen sulfide Slight J J
Carbon tetrachloride J J
Toluol J Y
Laundry detergent High J J
Softeners J J
Symbols:
JResistant
YPractically resistant
FSomewhat resistant
fSlightly resistant
jNot resistant
w. Hydrous solution
k.g. Cold saturated
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-35
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The housing of the heat-proof MDS 439 E data memory is made of polyphe-
nylene sulfide (i.e., PPS). The chemical resistance of the data memory is
excellent. No known solvent can dissolve this substance below 200° C. De-
terioration of the physical characteristics can be observed in hydrous solu-
tions of hydrochloric acid (HCl) and nitric acid (HNO3) at 80° C.
Resistance to all types of fuel, including methanol, is very good. The table
below provides an overview of the chemicals tested.
Table 3-10 Chemical resistance of the MDS 439 E made of polyphenylene sulfide
Sbt
Test Conditions
Elti
Substance Time
[Days]
Tempera-
ture
[° C]
Evaluation
Acetone
n-butanol (butyl alcohol)
Butanone-2 (methylethylketone)
n-butyl acetate
Brake fluid
Calcium chloride (saturated)
Diesel fuel
Diethyl ether
Freon 113
Anti-freeze
Kerosene
Methanol
Motor oil
Sodium chloride (saturated)
Sodium hydroxide (30%)
Sodium hypochlorite (5%)
Caustic soda (30%)
Nitric acid (10%)
Hydrochloric acid (10%)
Sulfuric acid (10%)
(10%)
(30%)
Test fuels
(FAM-DIN 51604-A)
Toluol
1, 1, 1-trichloroethane
Xylene
Zinc chloride (saturated)
180
180
180
180
40
40
180
40
40
180
40
180
40
40
180
30
180
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
180
180
180
180
180
40
55
80
60
80
80
80
80
23
23
120
60
60
80
80
80
80
80
93
23
80
23
80
23
80
80
80
80
75
80
80
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
/
–
+
+
–
+
/
+
+
/
+
/
+
+
+
Evaluation: + Resistant, weight gain < 3% or weight loss < 0.5% and/or drop in resistance to tearing < 15%
/ Somewhat resistant, 3 to 8% weight gain or 0.5 to 3% weight loss and/or 15 to 30% drop in
resistance to tearing
– Not resistant, weight gain > 8% or weight loss > 3% and/or drop in resistance to tearing > 30%
Polyphenylene sul-
fide (PPS)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-36 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.6 Configuration with MDS 507 and SLG 44
3.6.1 Configuring the Presence Check
Since the MDS 507 requires current from the dialog battery for communica-
tion with the SLG 44, the MDS should only be processed when a data trans-
fer is actually to be performed. If the user uses the presence check or the
filehandler, there is a danger that the MDS 507 battery will be drained in a
short time. This is particularly true when the MDS 507 stops opposite the
SLG and remains there.
The MDS battery would be dead in a few weeks.
For this reason, the ABTAST parameter was introduced for the MDS 507.
ABTAST is a time interval which should be configured realistically. A sam-
ple configuration is shown on the next few pages.
Function
SWhen no MDS is in the field, the field is continuously scanned for an
MDS as before. This ensures that an MDS command will be processed
immediately when the MDS enters the transmission window.
SWhen an MDS has been detected (i.e., MDS present), the surroundings of
the SLG are only scanned cyclically for an MDS. At the time intervals
specified by ABTAST, the ASM inquires whether the MDS is still pres-
ent.
SWhen the MDS has left the field, continuous scanning begins again, and a
new MDS is detected immediately.
SWhen the user sends an MDS command, this command is processed im-
mediately with the MDS regardless of ABTAST.
Note
If the MDS is removed from the field and a new MDS enters while the AB-
TAST time is running, the ASM does not detect a change in presence and
this information is not forwarded to the user.
A train consists of several cars. An MDS is attached to the middle of each
car. Each car must be clearly identified (i.e., the user must be able to detect
the “non-presence” of an MDS after an MDS has left the field but before the
next MDS enters the field of the SLG).
Since the train, and thus the MDS, may remain stopped opposite an SLG for
a very long period of time, MDS dialog battery discharging should be opti-
mized.
Sample configura-
tion of ABTAST
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-37
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Vmax = 50 km/h Maximum speed of the train at which the MDS is processed
S1min = 20 m Shortest distance between two data memories
L=2 mField length of the SLG with the MDS 507. Contrary to general configuration guide-
lines, the maximum possible field length of the SLG should be used here.
tNANW = 80 msec Time which the system requires to detect and report (constant) the “non-presence”
of an MDS
tABTAST Maximum time to be configured between two scanning intervals between MDS and
SLG
L
MDS
SLG
S1min
Figure 3-22 Sample configuration of tABTAST: Train with several cars
The following relationship exists.
tABTAST vS1min *L
Vmax *tNANW
tABTAST v20Ăm*2Ăm
50Ăkmńh*0.08Ă sec +1.296Ă sec *0.08Ă sec
tABTAST v1.2Ă sec
With this configuration, the MDS is processed at intervals of 1.2 sec for a
duration of 20 msec. If the MDS remains in front of the SLG for an entire
day, the MDS is only processed for the following time during one day.
t+0.02Ăs
1.2Ăs@24Ăh+0.4Ăh+24Ă min
The battery of the MDS is only used 24 minutes per day. See also table 3-11.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-38 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
0 40
tx
S
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
13.9 m
Speed triangle
The train travels 13.9 m (horizontal)
in 1 second (vertical). By connect-
ing the two end points, one obtains
the slope of the straight line for
VMDS. Additional parallel lines are
drawn at the interval of S1 (20 m).
t [ sec ]
a
b
Process the MDS
Continuously scan field for an MDS
The SLG remains off during this time.
Direction of movement of the train
S1min
S1min
t
L = Field length
1 s
Figure 3-23 Diagram of the configuration (drawn to scale)
Requirements for maximum tABTAST
tABTAST vtx*tNANW
as shown by the diagram: tx 1.3 sec
tx = Shown in the diagram: Time after which an MDS has left the field but
before the next MDS has entered the field of the SLG
a: MDS leaves the transmission window.
b: The next MDS enters the transmission window.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-39
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.6.2 Parameterization of the MDS 507 in the Software
Special parameterization of the MDS 507 is required so that the presence
check can be set.
The value tABTAST must be calculated and then forwarded to the interface
module. The time tABTAST is stored in one byte which is coded as shown
below.
tABTAST :
Bit:
Time value: 00* to 3F hex or 0* to 63
* 0 = Continuous field scanning
Time factor:
0 0 = 0.01 sec
0 1 = 0.1 sec
1 0 = 1.0 sec
1 1 = 10 sec
76543210
tABTAST +Timefactor *timevalue
Figure 3-24 Coding for tABTAST
The following table provides several rules of thumb on the actual processing
time per day of an MDS which has stopped permanently in front of the SLG.
Table 3-11 Actual processing time of an MDS
Time
tABTAST
[ Sec ]
tABTAST
[ H]
MDS-Processing1
per Day
Min. Life Span of MDS Battery2
(100 h for Continuous Operation)
0 00 24 h 4.2 days
0.01 01 16 h 6.2 days
0.05 05 9.6 h 10.5 days
0.1 40 4,8 h 20 days
0.5 45 58 min 104 days
1 80 29 min 207 days
5 85 5.8 min 3 years
10 C0 2.9 min > 5 years 3
50 C5 34 s > 5 years 3
100 CA 17 s > 5 years 3
1 The MDS is turned on for 20 msec for each ANW processing.
2 The values apply to an ambient temperature of Tu = 20° to 30° C.
Spontaneous discharge of the battery increases for higher ambient temperatures.
3 With an MDS battery older than 5 years, the life span of the battery is primarily deter-
mined by spontaneous discharge of the battery.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-40 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
tABTAST is transferred via the FB parameter assignment TYP=3. DB ZUW
contains the following parameters.
0401, 0000
tABTAST is specified in the 1st byte of DB DAT (left-hand data byte).
With the ASM 410, the MDS 507 is parameterized via the PIO (bit 4 of byte
1). tABTAST is transferred in byte 4 of the PIO during the RESET command.
When FB 230 is called, tABTAST is set with the ABTA parameter. It is trans-
ferred as a hex value from 0000 to 00FF.
Bit 12 in BEST has the following meaning when used with the MDS 507.
1 = The dialog battery of the MDS 507 has passed below the threshold value.
MDS 507 operation is set via the M507 parameter when FB 240 is called.
M507 must be set to 1. tABTAST time is then transferred in the ABTA para-
meter.
MDS 507 operation is set via the MOBY=2 parameter when FC 47 is called.
tABTAST time is then transferred in the ABTA parameter.
MDS 507 mode is enabled by setting the parameter MOBY_mode = 1
in UDT 10 of the FC 45 project. tABTAST is set with the parameter
scanning_time.
FB 250
ASM 410
FB 230/FB 246/
FC 46
FB 240/FC 44
FC 47/FB 47
FC 45
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-41
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.6.3 Extended Configuration Aids
The figure below shows the real transmission window between the MDS 507
and the SLG 44.
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
-
1400
-
1200
-
1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600
Field width in
millimeters
Field length in
millimeters
SLG 44
General conditions:
– Sa = 36 cm
– SLG with full receiving capacity
– Side lobes not shown
– Curves show the fields from the middle
of MDS to the middle of SLG.
Identification of the middle of the field on the
SLG
Window size in accordance with the stan-
dard configuration in the catalog
Switch-on window:
The MDS reports that it is ready in this win-
dow. The MDS must be located in this win-
dow so that its presence can be detected.
Processing window:
After the MDS has been activated in the in-
ner window, the MDS can be processed
with commands in this window (i.e., either
statically or dynamically).
If the MDS has not been processed with a
command (or the presence check) for a time
of taus > 6 msec, it switches the electronics
to standby status. The MDS must be lo-
cated in the inner window again when
another command is processed.
The MDS can still respond in this window.
This field occurs when the MDS is used with
the permanent presence check. Since this
window has little significance for the user, it
has been omitted in the diagrams which fol-
low.
Figure 3-25 Real transmission window between the MDS 507 and the SLG 44
The transmission
window
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-42 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
This figure shows the middle of the transmission window in accordance with
the standard configuration. The real transmission window is usually larger
depending on various factors. On the next few pages, the transmission win-
dow is shown under different general conditions. The general conditions are
listed below.
SOperating distance
SMain lobe or main and side lobe
SReduction of SLG receiving capacity
SAngle deviation
Main lobe with different operating distances
-1400
-1200
-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600
Field length in
mm
MDS 507
SLG 44
-1400
-1200
-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600
Field length
in mm
SLG 44
-1400
-1200
-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600
Field width
in mm
Field length
in mm
SLG 44
Field width
in mm
Field width
in mm
MDS 507MDS 507
Sa = 12 cm Sa = 36 cm Sa = 74 cm
Figure 3-26 Main lobe with different operating distances
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-43
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Main and side lobes with different operating distances
-1600
-1200
-800
-400
0
400
800
1200
1600
-1600-1200-800 -400 0 400 800 1200 1600
Field width
in mm
Sa = 12 cm
-1600
-1200
-800
-400
0
400
800
1200
1600
-1600-1200-800 -400 0 400 800 1200 1600
Field width
in mm
Field length
in mm
Sa = 36 cm
-1600
-1200
-800
-400
0
400
800
1200
1600
-1600-1200-800 -400 0 400 800 1200 1600 Field width
in mm
Field length
in mm
Sa = 74 cm
When operating distances are small (i.e.,
Sa = 100 mm, MDS = 300 mm), the width
of the field with main and side lobes is lar-
ger than the length of the field.
In the vicinity of the SLG, the transmission
gap between main and side lobes is no
longer detectable. The width of the trans-
mission gap is approx. 2 mm.
No side lobes are visible at an operating
distance of Sa > 600 mm.
Field length
in mm
Figure 3-27 Main and side lobes with different operating distances
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-44 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Reduction of SLG receiving capacity
Under interference-prone industrial conditions, the receiving capacity of the
SLG 44 can be reduced. Cf. chap. 3.6.5.
The figure below shows the transmission window of an SLG 44 with varying
receiving capacities. The switch-on window is shown for each.
Field width
in mm
Field length
in mm
Sa = 30 cm
-1600
-1200
-800
-400
0
400
800
1200
1600
-1600 -1200 -800 -400 0 400 800 1200 1600
Min. capacity (left setting on potentiometer)1
Middle-left setting on potentiometer1
Middle-right setting on potentiometer
Max. capacity (right setting on potentiometer)
1 No side lobes at Sa = 30 cm
Figure 3-28 Switch-on window for various receiving capacities
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-45
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
When the MDS 507 is used, the antennas of MDS and SLG must be aligned.
The following transmission windows result at an angle deviation (Φ).
-1600
-1200
-800
-400
0
400
800
1200
1600
-1600-1200 -800 -400 0 400 800 1200 1600
Field width
in mm
Field length
in mm Sa = 36 cm
-1600
-1200
-800
-400
0
400
800
1200
1600
-1600-1200 -800 -400 0 400 800 1200 1600
Field length in
mm
Field
width in
mm
Sa = 36 cm
F = 45 _F = 90 _
Figure 3-29 Switch-on window with various angle deviations
The following values are specified for the general configuration.
(SLG SLG)
(MDS MDS)
D+6Ăm
D1+4Ăm
When these values are adhered to, there are usually no reciprocal influences
even when SLG and MDS are installed under poor conditions. However, the
actual space available often makes it impossible to adhere to these required
minimum distances.
It is frequently possible to underrange the minimum distances. Field mea-
surement with suitable measuring instruments may have to be performed.
The following tables shows the absolute minimum distances (D).
Angle deviation
Distance D or D1
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-46 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Configuration
SLG 44 5)
1)
SLG A
SLG B
D
2)
SLG A SLG B
D
3) SLG A
SLG B
D
MDS
Sg
4)
SLG A SLG B
D
MDS
Sg
Max. sensitivity
Middle setting
Min. sensitivity
2.4
1.8
0.45
3.0
1.8
0.45
3.1
2.9
1.6
4.2
3.5
2.1
All specifications in meters (m)
1) Both SLGs have the main lobe pointed at each other. When the MDS (not shown) moves from SLG A to SLG B, the
configuration shown in column 3 results.
2) Both SLGs have the side lobes pointed at each other.
3) SLG A communicates with the MDS at the boundary of the main lobe. D is the minimum distance at which SLG B
stops receiving information from the MDS. The operating distance between MDS and SLG A is only a few
centimeters.
4) Setting of the receiving capacity is performed via the potentiometer as described in chapter 3.6.5 The strength of the
sending field remains unchanged at the maximum value.
Shows the direction of movement of an MDS
SgThe MDS is located on the boundary of the SLG.
5) Setting of the receiving capacity is performed via the potentiometer as described in chapter 3.6.5 The strength of the
sending field remains unchanged at the maximum value.
Applicable in general:
SThe values in the table are based on non-metallic surroundings.
SInstallation on metal may increase distance D significantly.
SThe special definition of D1 (minimum distance MDS ↔ MDS) must be:
Two MDSs must never be located in the field of one SLG at the same
time. However, it must be remembered that metallic surroundings may
increase the limit distance (and thus D1). The transmission windows
shown in this chapter can be used for the configuration of D1 (but only
when D1 must be < 4 m).
SSince the values specified here are subject to tolerances, we recommend
configuring all values with + 20%.
There are 2 modes with which MDS 507 can be processed with SLG 42 or
SLG 43.
a) The dialog battery on the MDS 507 is okay.
SThe field of the SLG 42/43 has the same shape as when working with
SLG 44. The middle of the field is the middle of the SLG.
SMDS 507 is direction-dependent.
SThe field data of the MDS are sharply reduced in comparison to operation
with SLG 44.
SRules of thumb for the limit distance
SLG 42 MDS 507: 150 mm
SLG 43 MDS 507: 300 mm
Processing the
MDS 507 with the
SLG 42/43
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-47
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
!Caution
The distance from MDS to MDS (D1) must have the specified value. If D1
is not adhered to, other MDSs which appear not to be in the field may be
processed by mistake.
Remember that, when still approx. 1 to 3 m away from the SLG, the MDS
507 is switched on already by the field of the SLG 42/43. The battery of the
MDS will be discharged continuously when the MDS is located between the
stated Sg and 1 m. Between 1 and 3 m, the MDS can still be switched on
occasionally.
b) The dialog battery of the MDS 507 is discharged or does not exist.
SThe MDS 507 can no longer be processed with the SLG 44.
SThe MDS 507 has a receiving antenna for power transmission (i.e., the
MDS can be processed with the SLG 42/43 without a dialog battery).
SThe data transmission of the MDS 507 is direction-dependent.
SRules of thumb for the limit distance:
SLG 42 MDS 507: 70 mm
SLG 43 MDS 507: 100 mm
Due to the transmission of power to the MDS, the limit distances speci-
fied here are much smaller than the values listed under a).
SGeneral functionality of the MDS 507 can always be checked in this oper-
ating mode.
SA dead dialog battery is not reported to the user when the MDS 507 is not
positioned in the middle. Cf. figure 3-30.
SLG 42 SLG 43
Sa = 25 mm
Figure 3-30 Transmission window of the MDS 507 with dead battery
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-48 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.6.4 Dead Battery Measurement and Changing the Battery for
MDS 507
Dead battery measurement with the STG
sa; sgDialog battery full: Limit distance Sg is approx. 60 mm.
Dialog battery empty: Limit distance Sg is approx. 25 mm.
Applicable in general:
The dialog battery is okay when MDS can be processed at
Sa > 40 mm.
Remember:
The dead battery message on the display of the STG is only indi-
cated when the MDS is operated in the boundary area of commu-
nication (e.g., at Sa = 20 mm). When the MDS is operated close to
the STG (e.g., Sa = 10 mm), power transmission from STG to MDS
becomes so strong that no dead battery message is displayed even
though the battery is actually dead.
Figure 3-31 Dead battery measurement with the STG
Dead battery measurement with SLG 43
Dialog battery full: Limit distance
Sg is approx. 340 mm.
Dialog battery empty: Limit distance
Sg is approx. 50 to 100 mm.
Applicable in general:
The dialog battery is okay if the MDS can be pro-
cessed at Sa > 50 mm and positioning of SLG to MDS
is in the middle, and if no dead battery message is
indicated.
Remember:
The dead battery message will not be generated correctly
when the MDS is not positioned in the middle.
Figure 3-32 Dead battery message with SLG 43
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-49
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
a) Unlock the four housing locking mechanisms.
b) At the lower ends, press the locks simultaneously towards the inside, and
lift the upper part of the housing with the electronics.
Note
Temperature fluctuations can create a semi vacuum inside the MDS making
it difficult to lift the upper part of the housing. If this happens, use a small
screw driver to separate the upper part of the housing from the lower part
while pressing the locking mechanisms at the same time.
c) Open the battery compartment with a crosstip screw driver.
Changing the
battery
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-50 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
d) Using the plug-in terminal, remove the used battery block from the MDS
and install the new battery block. Install cable, plug connector and bat-
tery in the battery compartment as shown.
The battery voltages can be checked as
shown in the adjacent drawing.
New
Battery
Bad
Battery
1 To measure voltage U2, install a load resistor (RL = 1 kΩ) in parallel to the mea-
suring instrument. This is particularly important for bad batteries.
–
–
Black White
Blue
Red
RL = 1 kW1
U1
3.1 V
U2
9.3 V
U1
< 2.7 V
U2 1
< 7.9 V
!Caution
Use original replacement batteries only.
e) Place cover on battery compartment, and tighten the screws slightly. The
clamps on the cover of the battery compartment should now hold the new
batteries in place. This can be checked by shaking the MDS. There
should be no rattling inside.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-51
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
f) Place the MDS back on the housing cover (1), and close the locking me-
chanisms (2).
1
2
g) Before being used again, the MDS 507 must be initialized or formatted.
!Caution
The contents of the RAM are lost when the battery is changed. If necessary,
the user data can be stored intermediately on an STG.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-52 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.6.5 Reducing the Sensitivity of the SLG 44
The measures described in this chapter are only required when the SLG is
receiving excessive interference from other devices. Such interference is
indicated by the yellow LED on the SLG.
A reduction of the receiving capacity should not be necessary when all com-
ponents of a system adhere to the guidelines on radio technology. The sensi-
tivity of an SLG 44 should not be reduced before system interference is cor-
rectly suppressed. To accomplish this, follow the steps below.
1. Install the SLG, and make sure that no MDS is in the vicinity. If the yel-
low LED goes on, this means that the location at which the SLG is instal-
led is causing interference. The receiving capacity of the SLG must be
reduced.
2. Turn the potentiometer counter clockwise until the yellow LED goes off.
3. Move an MDS 507 into the field of the SLG 44. The green LED indica-
tes how great the limit distance still is with reduced sensitivity.
1 m
0.65 m
0.3 m
Potentiometer to reduce
receiving capacity of the
SLG
Protective cap
(removed)
Limit Distance at Reduced Sensitivity
(Approx. Values)
To the right
Middle position
To the left
Factory setting:
“To the right” corresponds to maxi-
mum sensitivity.
Figure 3-33 Reduction of the receiving capacity of the SLG 44
Reducing the re-
ceiving capacity
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-53
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
!Caution
The sending strength of the SLG is retained even when the receiving capac-
ity is reduced. This creates an area in the boundary area of the SLG in
which the MDS has already been switched on but the SLG cannot yet com-
municate with the MDS. Measures should be provided in the system to pre-
vent an MDS from remaining overly long in the boundary area of an SLG
whose receiving capacity has been reduced.
When an MDS does remain in this boundary area for a longer period of time
anyway (e.g., several days), premature failure of the MDS battery must be
expected.
If this happens, the strength of the sending field can be reduced. Since this
involves a manipulation of the circuitry, only authorized personnel may per-
form this task.
The procedure is described in the next section.
Option: Reduction of the strength of the sending field
!Caution
The following procedure involving the circuitry of the SLG 44 may only be
performed by authorized personnel.
The procedure may only be performed when the voltage is off. The EMC/
ESD protective measures for electronic circuits must be adhered to.
Reduction of the strength of the sending field of the SLG 44 may become
necessary under one or more of the following conditions.
SAn MDS remains in the boundary area of a “sensitivity-reduced” SLG for
a long period of time.
SA second SLG is to be positioned in the immediate vicinity.
The receiving capacity of the SLG must have already been reduced as de-
scribed above before the measures below may be performed.
The SLG 44 is always delivered with maximum sending field strength. The
sending field strength is reduced by soldering in short-circuit jumpers in the
electronics. The following steps must be performed.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-54 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
a) After removing the eight crosstip screws, open the cover of the SLG 44.
Figure 3-34 Opening the cover of the SLG 44
b) On the protruding soldering bases (A, B, C and D), solder in 1 to 4 solde-
red jumpers with an electronics soldering iron.
ABCD
Soldered jumpers for reduction of the
sending field strength of the SLG
Service plug connector for
programming the SLG Antenna measuring points
(An anti-resonance resistor can be sol-
dered in here as an option instead of the
soldered jumpers.)
Figure 3-35 Soldered jumpers and antenna measuring points on the SLG 44
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-55
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 3-12 Limit distance Sg for reduced sending field strength
Jumper Sg
None 1 m
A + D 0.9 m
A + D + B 0.8 m
A + D + B + C 0.5 m
These limit distances have been measured for an SLG with full receiving
capacity.
When setting the jumpers, make sure that the range of the sending field
strength is smaller than or equal to the receiving range.
c) A test should be performed before the SLG is closed again. Several jum-
per combinations may have to be tested.
d) Identification of the hardware status
The modified status of the SLG must be marked on the outside. A label
with date and jumpers used must be affixed next to the SLG plug connec-
tor.
Date ...
Jumpers:
Figure 3-36 Label for identification of the hardware status
e) Close the housing as shown below.
!Caution
Fulfillment of protection rating IP65 requires that the SLG be provided with
a new seal.
Carefully place new seal on the cover. Place the SLG on top, and press to-
gether.
Make sure that the seal is not pinched. Then tighten the screws.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-56 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.7 Configuration with MDS 439 E (Heat-Proof)
3.7.1 Temperature Dependency of the Transmission Window
With the exception of the limit distance and the field length at temperatures
in excess of 85° C, the same guidelines as described in chap. 3.1 for the other
MDSs apply to the configuration of heat-proof data memories. For example,
the calculation of the transmission window includes the factor 0.8, and the
production tolerances and temperature influences up to 85° C have been con-
sidered. However, this factor is not a constant. Instead, it is a function of the
temperature which must be considered when 85° C (up to 110° C) is ex-
ceeded (i.e., when the mean temperature inside the data memory exceeds
85°C, an additional offset factor must be included in the calculation).
tv[Tt85Ă°ĂC]+L@0.8
VMDS
Sg[Tu85Ă°ĂC]+Sg@CL[Tu85Ă°ĂC]+L@C
tv[Tu85Ă°ĂC]+L@C@0.8
VMDS
[m]
ƪmńsecƫ
L = Field length
Sg = Limit distance between MDS - SLG
VMDS = Speed of the MDS
C = Offset factor for temperatures > 85° C (cf. figure 3-37)
tV = Transmit period of the MDS
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-57
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
0,70
0,75
0,80
0,85
0,90
0,95
1,00
1,05
1,10
0 102030405060708090100110
T
C [Offset factor]
MDS 439 E
[° C]
Figure 3-37 Offset factor C in relation to the temperature
The following chart shows the reduction of the limit distance and the field
length under excessive processing temperatures (i.e., inner temperatures of
the MDS).
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
MDS 439 E
[° C]Interior temperature
[%]
Figure 3-38 Reduction of field length and limit distance
The decrease in field data under high temperatures is caused by the higher
current consumption of the electronics.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-58 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.7.2 Temperatures During Cyclic Operation
Cyclic operation is not required for ambient temperatures up to 110° C (i.e.,
up to this temperature, the MDS can be used continuously).
For ambient temperatures > 110° C, it must be ensured that the interior tem-
perature of the MDS does not exceed the critical threshold (i.e., 110° C).
Each period of heating up must be followed by a period of cooling off. Sev-
eral limit cycles are shown in the following table.
Table 3-13 Limit cycles of the temperature for MDS 439 E
Tu (Heating Up) Heating Up Tu (Cooling Off) Cooling Off
220° C 0,5 h 25° C> 2 h
200° C1 h 25° C> 2 h
190° C1 h 25° C> 1 h 45 min
180° C2 h 25° C> 5 h
170° C2 h 25° C> 4 h
The interior temperature of the MDS follows an e-function. This makes it
possible to calculate in advance the interior temperature or the functionality
of the MDS. This is particularly important for applications in which temper-
ature is a critical factor or which work with a complex temperature profile.
Note
On request, Siemens will calculate the temperature curves.
A precise knowledge of the interior temperature simplifies configuration of
applications in which temperature is a critical factor.
!Caution
Ambient temperatures > 220° C
Exposing the data memories to ambient temperatures over 220° C will inval-
idate all rights to warranty claims.
However, physical stability is maintained up to 230° C!
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-59
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 3-14 Typical temperature profile of an application in a paint shop
Start of MDS at i-Point Time Duration
(Min.)
Ambient Temperature (°C)
KTL bath
KTL dryer
Transport
PVC dryer
Transport
Filler dryer
Transport
Base coat dryer
Transport
Wax dryer
Transport
20
60
60
25
60
60
60
60
60
25
150
30
200
25
170
25
160
25
120
25
100
25
0
50
100
150
200
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 [min]
Temperature
Time
[_C]
dryer
KTL
dryer
PVC
dryer
Filler
dryer
dryer
Base coat
Wax
KTL bath
Figure 3-39 Diagram of the temperature progression from table 3-14
Example of a
cyclic process
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-60 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The results of the simulation are listed below.
After a simulation time of 36.5 hours, a total of 3 cycles were passed
through, and an interior temperature of 90 degrees Centigrade was reached.
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 [min]
Temperature
Time
Ambient temperature
Interior tempe-
rature of the
MDS
Maximum interior temperature
inside the MDS (in this example)
[_C]
Figure 3-40 Complete temperature progression during simulation
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-61
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.7.3 Life Span of the Mobile Data Memory
The life span of the data memory is affected by several factors.
SLife span of the electronics
SNumber of temperature cycles
SType of temperature cycles
SNumber of write-accesses
SAging of the housing
SAging of the heat insulation
SFrequency of write-accesses
SData retention time of the EEPROM
SMechanical stress
The frequency of write-accesses is the primary factor affecting the life
span of the data memory.
Operation with ECC driver
The ECC driver provides additional security on the correctness of MDS data.
The manufacturer of the data memory guarantees only 10,000 write-accesses.
When the ECC driver is used, the user is ensured the same data security up to
the actual end of the MDS life span.
Notes on ECC use
SAccesses times to MDS data are increased (i.e., less data can be processed
during dynamic operation).
SThe net capacity of the MDS is reduced.
SWhen a data correction is performed, the result may be delayed by as
much as one second.
!Caution
Interior temperature > 110° C
When the MDS is used at an interior temperature > 110° C, all rights to
guarantee claims are invalidated. The data contents of the EEPROM may be
lost at interior temperatures > 110° C. An error message is generated during
the next processing procedure, and the error status can be corrected by ini-
tializing the MDS.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-62 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.8 EMC Guidelines
3.8.1 Foreword
The EMC guidelines contain the following information.
SWhy are the EMC guidelines necessary?
SWhat interference affects the controller from the outside?
SHow can interference be prevented?
SHow can interference be corrected?
SWhich standards apply to the EMC guidelines?
SExamples of an interference-suppressed system setup
The description is directed to “qualified personnel.”
SConfiguration engineers and planners who plan system configuration with
the MOBY modules and who must adhere to the required guidelines
SSkilled personnel and service engineers who install the connection cables
based on this description or who can correct deficiencies in this area when
a malfunction occurs.
!Warning
Non-adherence to especially highlighted notes can cause dangerous states in
the system or destroy either single components or the entire system.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-63
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.8.2 General
The continuously growing use of electrical and electronic devices brings with
it the following characteristics.
SGreater concentration of components
SIncreasing capacity of power electronics
SRising switching speeds
SLower current consumption of the components
The higher the degree of automation, the greater the danger that devices will
interfere with one another.
Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) is the ability of a piece of electri-
cal or electronic equipment to function correctly in an electromagnetic envi-
ronment without interfering with or adversely affecting its surroundings
within certain limits.
EMC can be divided into three areas.
SIntrinsic interference immunity
Resistance to internal (i.e., own) electrical interference
SFree interference immunity
Resistance to external electromagnetic interference
SDegree of interference emission
Interference emission and effects of the electrical environment
All three areas are included in the test of an electrical device.
MOBY modules are tested for adherence to certain limit values. Since
MOBY modules are only one of many components in a total system and the
combination of various components may also create sources of interference,
certain guidelines must be adhered to when setting up a system.
EMC measures usually consist of an entire package of measures all of which
must be taken in order to obtain an interference-immune system.
Note
SThe system provider is responsible for adherence to the EMC guidelines,
while the user is responsible for the interference suppression of the com-
plete system.
SAll measures taken while the system is being set up will eliminate the
need for expensive modifications and removal of interference sources
later.
SAlthough the regulations of specific countries must also be adhered to,
this information is not covered in the documentation.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-64 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.8.3 Spreading of Interference
Three factors are required before interference can affect a system.
SSource of interference
SCoupling path
SPotentially susceptible equipment
Potentially susceptible
device
Ex: An SLG 43
Interference source
Ex: A drive Ex: A MOBY cable
Coupling path
Figure 3-41 Spreading of interference
If one of these factors is missing (e.g., the coupling path between the source
of the interference and the potentially susceptible device), the susceptible
device will not be affected even when strong interference is being emitted.
The EMC measures affect all three factors to prevent any malfunctions
caused by interference. When a system is set up, the provider must take all
possible measures to prevent the creation of sources of interference.
SOnly equipment which meets limit value class A of VDE 0871 may be
used in a system.
SAll interference caused by devices must be suppressed. This includes all
coils and windings.
SThe layout of the cabinet must be such that reciprocal interference of the
individual components is avoided or kept as low as possible.
SMeasures must be taken to eliminate interference from external sources.
The next few chapters provide information and tips on how to set up a sys-
tem.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-65
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
It is necessary to be familiar with the most frequent sources of interference in
order to achieve a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., a very
low degree of interference in the environment) in a system. These sources of
interference must be eliminated by taking appropriate measures.
Table 3-15 Interference sources: Origin and effects
Interference Source Interference Origin Effect on Potentially Suscepti-
ble Equipment
Contactor, electronic
l
Contacts Power network malfunctions
valves Coils Magnetic field
Electric motor Collector Electrical field
Winding Magnetic field
Electric welding device Contacts Electrical field
Transformer Magnetic field, power network
malfunction, equalizing currents
Power pack, switched-
mode
Circuit Electrical and magnetic field,
power network malfunction
High-frequency devices Circuit Electromagnetic field
Sender (e.g., industrial
radios)
Antenna Electromagnetic field
Difference in grounding
or reference potential
Voltage difference Equalizing currents
Operator Static charging Electrical discharging currents,
electrical field
High-voltage current ca-
ble
Current flow Electrical and magnetic field,
power network malfunction
High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field
Sources of interfe-
rence
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-66 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
A coupling path is required before interference generated by the source can
take effect. There are four kinds of interference coupling.
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
Galvanic coupling path
Capacitive coupling path
Inductive coupling path
Emission coupling
I
N
T
E
R
F
E
E
N
C
E
S
O
U
R
C
E
P
O
T
E
N
T
I
A
L
L
Y
S
U
S
C
E
P
T
I
B
L
E
D
E
V
I
C
E
Figure 3-42 The four kinds of interference coupling
When MOBY modules are used, various components of the total system can
act as coupling paths.
Table 3-16 Causes of coupling paths
Coupling Path Cause
Cables and lines Incorrect or unfavorable installation
Missing or incorrectly connected shields
Cables spaced unfavorably
Switching cabinet or
SIMATIC h i
Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing line
SIMATIC housing Missing or incorrect grounding
Cables spaced unfavorably
Modules not installed securely
Poor cabinet layout
Coupling paths
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-67
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.8.4 Cabinet Layout
User influence on the configuration of an interference-immune system in-
cludes the cabinet layout, cable installation, grounding connections and cor-
rect shielding of lines.
Note
For notes on correct cabinet layout in accordance with EMC guidelines, see
the layout guidelines of the SIMATIC controller.
Metal housings for potentially susceptible equipment can be used to keep out
magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves. The better the
induced interference current can flow, the greater the spontaneous weakening
of the field of interference. All sheet metal on the housings or sheet metal in
the cabinet must be well connected together (i.e., with a high degree of con-
ductivity).
Figure 3-43 Shielding via housing
When the sheet metal parts of switching cabinets are insulated against each
other, a high-frequency conductive connection with the ribbon cables and
high-frequency terminals or HF conductive paste can be created. The greater
the connection surface, the better the high-frequency conductive capacity.
This cannot be achieved by connection with simple wires.
Shielding via
housing
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-68 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Good interference diversion is achieved by installing SIMATIC controllers on
conductive mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the switching cabi-
net, interference can be easily avoided by adhering to guidelines. Power
components (e.g., transformers, drives and load power supplies) should be
installed separately (i.e., separated by space) from the controller components
(e.g., relay controllers and SIMATIC S5).
The following basic principles apply.
1. The effect of interference decreases, the greater the distance between in-
terference source and potentially susceptible equipment.
2. Interference is further reduced by installing shielding plates.
3. Load lines and high-voltage current cables must be installed separately
from the signal lines at a distance of at least 10 cm.
PS
CPU/EU
Drive
Shielding
plate
Figure 3-44 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout
Avoiding
interference via
optimal layout
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-69
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
External interference from the power network can be avoided by installing
power network filters. In addition to correct dimensioning, proper installa-
tion is very important. It is imperative that the power network filter be in-
stalled directly at the entrance to the cabinet. Interference currents are filte-
red out early at the entrance and not conducted through the cabinet.
Power filter
Is
Right
Power filter
Wrong
IS = Interference current
Is
Figure 3-45 Filtering the supply voltage
Filtering the
supply voltage
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-70 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.8.5 Avoiding Interference Sources
Sources of interference in a system must be avoided so that a higher degree
of interference immunity can be achieved. All circuited inductivities are a
frequent cause of interference in a system.
Since relays, contactors and so on generate interference voltages, this interfe-
rence must be suppressed with one of the following circuits.
When the coil is switched, up to 800 V can be created on 24 V coils even
with small relays. Several kV of interference voltagecan be created on 220 V
coils. By using free-wheeling diodes or RC circuitry, the interference voltage
is prevented and, with it, the inductive interference in the lines parallel to the
coil lines.
Relay coils
Contactors
Valves
Brakes
Figure 3-46 Suppression of inductive interference
Note
All coils in the cabinet must be interference-suppressed. Values and motor
brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the switching cabinet
must be subjected to a special test.
Interference
suppression of
inductivities
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-71
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.8.6 Equipotential Bonding
Differing layouts of the system parts and differing voltage levels can cause
differences in potential between the parts of a system. When the system parts
are connected via signal lines, equalizing currents flow through these signal
lines. These equalizing currents can distort the signals.
This makes correct equipotential bonding imperative.
SThe cross section of the equipotential bonding line must be large enough
(i.e., at least 10 mm2).
SThe space between signal cable and related equipotential bonding line
must be kept as small as possible (i.e., antenna effect).
SA fine-wire line must be used (i.e., better conduction of high frequencies).
SWhen connecting equipotential bonding lines to the central equipotential
bonding rail, power components and non-power components must be
combined.
Power pack
PLC
EU
EU
EU
Drive
Wrong
Wrong
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
Figure 3-47 Equipotential bonding
The better the equipotential bonding in a system, the smaller the chance of
interference caused by fluctuations in potential.
Equipotential bonding should not be confused with the protective grounding
of a system. Protective grounding prevents the creation of excessive touch
voltages when devices malfunction.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-72 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.8.7 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY
SLG
230 V
24 V
ASM
L+
L–
Ungrounded
power pack
Ground fault monitoring device. When a
voltage asymmetry against protective
ground occurs on lines L+ or L–, the cur-
rent circuit is interrupted.
Interface to the computer or PC
To connect a grounded computer or PC, the con-
nection must contain a galvanic decoupler (e.g.,
optocoupler).
R
RR
R
Figure 3-48 Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring
The SIMATIC is a grounded system. In the power pack of the SIMATIC, 0 V
(i.e., signal ground) is connected to the housing. On the ASM 400/401, the
0 V signal of the external 24 V power pack is connected with 0 V of the SI-
MATIC. The connection between the ASM 400/401 (SIMATIC) and the SLG
is equipotentially bonded (i.e., RS 422 interface without galvanic isolation).
A direct setup with grounding fault monitoring is not possible. Proceed as
described in the SIMATIC manual if grounding fault monitoring is necessary.
SIMATIC with
ASM 400/401
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-73
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Grounding
fault moni-
toring
C
P
U
PLC 100U
Galvanic isolation
SLG
ASM 410
230 V
24 V
Figure 3-49 SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410
The ASM 410 is equipped with galvanic isolation to the SIMATIC CPU. A
layout with grounding fault monitoring is simple.
The SIM is available with RS 422, V.24 and TTY interfaces.
A layout with grounding fault monitoring requires galvanic isolation (i.e., a
layout with the TTY interface).
230 V
24 V
Grounding
fault moni-
toring
SIM
- TTY -
C
P
U
PLC 100U
Galvanic isolation
SLG
Figure 3-50 Serial interface SIM with TTY interface
SIMATIC PLC 100U
with ASM 410
Serial interface
SIM
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-74 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.8.8 Shielding the Cables
To suppress interference in the signal cables, these cables must be shielded.
The best shielding effect is achieved by installation in steel piping. However,
this is only necessary when the signal lines must pass through an interfer-
ence-prone environment. In most cases, the use of cables with braided
shields is sufficient. In either situation, correct connection is decisive for the
shielding action.
Note
A shield which is not connected at all or is connected incorrectly has no
shielding effect.
The following principles apply.
SFor analog signal lines, the shield connection must be one-sided and on
the receiver side.
SFor digital signal lines, the shield connection must be two-sided on the
housing.
SSince interference signals are frequently in the HF range (i.e., > 10 kHz),
connection of the HF-capacity shield must be provided over a large sur-
face.
Figure 3-51 Shielding of the cables
The shield rail must be connected to the housing of the switching cabinet
over a large surface (i.e., good conductivity) and must be located as close to
the cable lead-in as possible. The cables must be bared and clamped (high-
frequency clamp) to the shield rail or bound with cable binders. The position
must have good conductivity.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-75
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Remove
paint
Cable binder
Figure 3-52 Connection of the shield rail
The shield rail must be connected with the protective ground (PE) rail.
When shielded cables must be interrupted, the shield must also be applied to
the plug connector housing. Only suitable plug connectors may be used.
ÔÔÔÔÔ
ÖÖÖÖ
ÖÖÖÖ
Shield turned up backwards
by 180° and connected with
the plug connector housing
Rubber sleeve
Figure 3-53 Interruption of shielded cables
When adapter plugs which do not have suitable shield termination are used,
the shield must be continued through cable clamps to the point of interrup-
tion. This ensures a large-surface, HF conductive connection.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-76 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.8.9 Basic Rules on EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) can often be ensured by following
a few elementary rules. Rules which apply to the layout of the cabinet are
listed below.
SProtect the programmable controller from external interference by instal-
ling it in a cabinet or housing. The cabinet or the housing must be in-
cluded in the grounding connection.
SShield electromagnetic fields of inductivity from the programmable con-
troller with separator plates.
SUse metallic plug housings for shielded data transmission lines.
SConnect all inactive metal parts with low HF resistance over a large sur-
face.
SProvide a large-surface connection between the inactive metal parts and
the central grounding point.
SRemember to connect the shield rail to ground (i.e., a large-area connec-
tion of the shield rail to ground must be provided).
SAluminum parts should not be used for grounding connections.
SOrganize the cables into groups, and install these groups separately.
SAlways install high-voltage current lines and signal lines in separate ducts
or bundles.
SIntroduce all cabling into the cabinet from only one side and, if possible,
at one level.
SInstall the signal lines as close to the grounding surfaces as possible.
STwist the feeder and return conductors of individually installed conduc-
tors.
Shielding via
housing
Large-surface
grounding
connection
Planning the
cabling
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-77
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SShield the data transmission lines, and apply the shield on both sides.
SShield the analog lines, and apply the shield on one side (e.g., on the
drive).
SAlways apply the line shields at the cabinet entrance to the shield rail
over a large surface, and secure these with clamps.
SContinue the applied shield without interruption to the module.
SUse braided shields and not foil shields.
SOnly use power supply filters with metal housings.
SConnect the filter housing (i.e., connection must be low HF resistant and
over a large surface) to cabinet ground.
SNever secure the filter housing to painted surfaces.
SSecure the filter at the cabinet entrance or in the direction of the interfer-
ence source.
Shielding the lines
Power supply and
signal filter
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-78 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.9 Concept of MOBY Shielding
With MOBY I, the data are transferred between ASM and SLG over an
RS 422 interface at a speed of 19200 baud. The distance between ASM and
SLG may be up to 1000 m. MOBY cable installation should be treated the
same as that of a data processing system. Special attention should be paid to
shielding of all data cables. The following figures show the primary points
required for a secure layout.
Ï
Ï
230 V
24 V
Additional power consumers
Additional
SLGs
The cable shield is ap-
plied to the SLG plug
connector on the appro-
priate shield pin. The
cable shield of the SLG
may not be applied to a
grounded point (i.e., no
grounding clamp).
Each cabinet is
centrally grounded.
The voltage supply of the SLGs should be provided by the
2-pole plug connector on the ASM. The ASM is equipped
with electrical fuses and a filter circuit against interference
peaks. This filters out interference peaks and frequencies
which may be caused by “additional power consumers.”
The cable jacket of the SLG cables must be bared
directly at the cable lead-in. A shield clamp is
used for the connection of the cable shield to the
grounding rail. This will divert interference vol-
tages of + 2.5 kV on the SLG cable. Careful shield
connection is particularly important for long cables
or interference-prone industrial environments.
Grounding rail for all shielded cables. It must be located
as close as possible to the cable lead-in in the cabinet.
The rail must be grounded to the cabinet over a large
surface and use short connections.
Figure 3-54 Simple layout with ASM 400/401
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-79
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
When connecting the SLG to the ASM 470/475, it is essential that a shield
connection terminal be used for the cable shield. Shield connection terminals
and holders are standard components of the S7-300 product family.
Shield connection terminal Shield connecting
element
Cable to SLG 1 Cable to SLG 2
Figure 3-55 Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield connecting element
To divert interference which may occur on the connection cable to the SLG,
proceed as described for the ASM 400.
Layout of an
S7-300 with MOBY
Connection of
other modules
(e.g., ASM 410)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-80 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.10 Cable and Plug Connector Assignments
The cable jacket of SLG connection cables used with MOBY is made of
polyurethane (i.e., PUR in accordance with VDE 0250). This ensures very
good cable resistance to oils, acids, caustic solutions and hydraulic fluids.
3.10.1 Cable Configuration
The cable between ASM and SLG requires six cores + shield. Four of these
cores are assigned to the serial data interface. The power supply of the SLG
requires two cores. The data can be transferred over distances of up to
1000 m, almost without regard to the diameter of the wire.
Since voltage is present on the connection cable due to the current consump-
tion of the SLG, permitted cable lengths are usually shorter than 1000 m.
The length depends on the current consumption of the SLG and the ohmic
resistance of the connection cable.
Please also observe the information in chapter 6.8 “Setup and Function”
when using a Serial Interface Module (SIM).
The following table gives an overview of permissible cable lengths.
Table 3-17 Cable configuration
Con-
ductor
Cross
Sec-
Con-
ductor
Dia-
meter
Resis-
tance
Ω/km1
SLG 40/SLG 41
(I = 90 mA) Max.
Cable Length at
SLG 42
(I = 180 mA) Max.
Cable Length at
SLG 43
(I = 250 mA) Max.
Cable Length at
SLG 44
(I = 80 mA) Max.
Cable Length at
Sec
tion in
mm2
meter
in mm UV=24V UV=30V UV=24V UV=30V UV=24V UV=30V UV=24V UV=30V
0.07 20.3 2550 120 240 40 100 30 70 90 200
0.2 0.5 185 360 720 120 300 85 210 250 650
0.5 0.8 70 950 1000 310 790 230 570 700 1000
0.8 21.0 250 1000 1000 440 1000 320 800 1000 1000
1.5 21.4 224 1000 1000 920 1000 660 1000 1000 1000
1 The resistance values are average values. They refer to the forward and return conductors. A single wire has half the
resistance.
2 Use of these conductor cross sections requires crimp contacts (not included) in the SLG connection plug.
Field with gray background:
Recommended by Siemens: Standard cable, LiYC11Y, 6 x 0.25, shielded. The cable is available from Siemens under
the order number 6GT2 090-0A...
We recommend always applying the shield of the SLG cable to a grounding
rail over a large surface.
The SLG/SIM can also be connected with a cable that can be dragged.
Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 x 2 x 0.25.
The cable can be made by the customer.
Gounding of
the SLG cable
Cable with drag
capability
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-81
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
When a supplementary power pack is installed in the vicinity of the SLG, the
maximum cable length (i.e., 1000 m) between ASM and SLG can always be
used.
230 V
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
SLG
1000 m (max.)
24 V =
90 -
6-core (with 24 V connection)
Note
The 24 V power supply line
(i.e., pin 2 in the SLG plug) may
not be connected to the ASM.
Figure 3-56 SLG with supplementary power pack
The power pack shown in the drawing is available from Siemens under order
number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see chapter 7.2).
The customer must provide the cable from the supplementary power pack to
the SLG.
Note
The power pack can also be used as the main power pack for the ASM 400,
ASM 424 or ASM 454. See figure 3-57.
Ï
Ï
SLG
1, 4
2, 3
GND
+24 Volt
230 V
24 V =
Pin assignment on
the socket connector
6GT2 494-0AA00
Figure 3-57 MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400
Supplementary
power pack for
SLG
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-82 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.10.2 Plug Connector Assignment
Table 3-18 Plug connector assignment of the SLG plug connector1
Pin Designation
1– Receiving
2+ 24 Volt
3Ground (0 V)
4+ Sending
5– Sending
6+ Receiving
Cable sield
1 This plug connector applies to SLG 40, SLG 41, SLG 42, SLG 43 and SLG 44.
Table 3-19 Plug connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D plug
connector1
Pin Desigantion
1Not used
2+ Sending
3+ Receiving
4Not used
5- Receiving
6- Sending
7Ground (0 V)
8+24 Volt (see caution note)
9Not used
Geh. Cable shield
1 This plug connector assignment applies to:
ASM 400, ASM 424, ASM 454, ES 030 => SLG
ASM 400, ASM 410 (STG plug connector).
Note
When making your own cables, remember that the “sending” signal of the
SLG must be connected to the “receiving” signal of the ASM,and vice versa.
!Caution
When using the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG, do not
wire the +24 Volt pin to the ASM. Cf. table 3-19.
1
6
5
4
3
2
Plug connector on the
SLG
9-pin subminiature D
plug connector with
screw-type lock
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-83
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
If the SLG plug connector has to be turned in a different direction when using
a prefabricated cable, proceed as shown in the drawing below to position the
contact support differently.
The plug connector on the SLG cannot be turned.
Knurled screw for solid con-
nections (no tools needed)
Removable housing cover
for easy mounting
Cage-claw cable retainer
Crimp contacts for
use even with strong
vibration*
Secure the contact
support in 7 positions.
* Crimp snap-on connector available from:
Hirschmann
D-72606 Nuertingen
Tel: 07127/14-1479
Type: XZC0700
Order no: 932 507-001
Figure 3-58 Drawing of mounting the SLG plug connector
Ordering data
Table 3-20 Ordering data for the SLG plug connector
SLG-side, 6-pin plug with socket contacts for crimping
with bent output
(Contact support must be secured in 7 positions.)
S1 each
S1 package (10 each)
with straight output
S1 each
6GT2 090-0BA00
6GT2 090-0BA10
6GT2 090-0UA00
Installing the SLG
plug connector
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-84 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.10.3 Connection Cables
Housing
2
6
3
5
7
8
6
1
4
5
3
2
2
9-pin subminiature
D (pins, screw-
type locking)
SLG plug con-
nector2 (socket)
1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire
this pin to the ASM.
2 6GT2 091-0A... With angled SLG plug (standard)
6GT2 091-2A... With straight SLG plug (not shown)
1
Figure 3-59 Connection cable: ASM 400/401/424/454, ES 030 ↔ SLG
6
1
4
5
3
2
X1/2
X1/3
X1/1
X1/4
X2/3
X2/1
X1/5
X2/5
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
2m
Two 5-pin round M12 plug connectors SLG plug connector (socket)
X1 X2
25
18,5
Figure 3-60 Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG
Connection cable
for ASM 400/401/
424/454,
ES 030 ↔SLG
6GT2 091-0A...
or
6GT2 091-2A...
Connection cable
for ASM 450/452/
473 ↔ SLG
6GT2 091-1CH20
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-85
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
(Shield)
1
4
5
3
2
1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not
wire this pin to the ASM.
2 6GT2 091-0D... With angled SLG plug (standard)
6GT2 091-2D... With straight SLG plug (not shown)
3 (7)
4 (8)
5 (9)
6 (10)
2
1
1
6
Cable with core sleeves
SLG plug connector2
(socket)
Figure 3-61 Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG
!Caution
The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the inter-
face module and grounded on a grounding rail.
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Pink
Gray
(Shield)
6
1
4
5
2
3
4 (12)
5 (13)
6 (14)
7 (15)
8 (16)
9 (17)
Cable shield bared
Cable with core sleeves
SLG plug connector1
(socket)
1 6GT2 091-0E... With angled SLG plug (standard)
6GT2 091-2E... With straight SLG plug (not shown)
Figure 3-62 Connection cable: ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG
Connection cable
for
ASM 410 ↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0D...
or
6GT2 091-2D...
Connection cable
for ASM 470/475
↔ SLG
6GT2 091-0E...
or
6GT2 091-2E...
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-86 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
9-pin, sub D
(pins, screw lock)
Housing
2
3
5
* Made by customer, up to 32 m
PC sideASM side
9-pin, sub D
(socket, screw
lock)
Housing
2
3
5
RxDTxD
TxDRxD
0 V 0 V
l* (5 m/20 m)
Figure 3-63 Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 424
Connection cable
RS 232
PC ↔ ASM 424
6GT2 391-0B...
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-87
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.10.4 Cable Lengths
Starting on 10.01.2001 the length key is no longer supported for MOBY ca-
bles. Cables are now only offered in certain lengths. See table 3-21.
The cables are based on the following rules.
SLoose cables only in the lengths 50 m, 120 m, and 800 m
SFabricated cables only in the lengths 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m
Customers may make their own cables in all lengths. See table 3-17.
Table 3-21 Ordering data for MOBY cables
SLG stub line, fabricated
Between ASM 400/401/424/454,
ES 030-K and SLG
SSLG plug bent
Length: 5 m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 091-0AH50
6GT2 091-0AN10
6GT2 091-0AN20
6GT2 091-0AN50
SSLG plug straight
Length: 10 m
50 m
6GT2 091-2AN10
6GT2 091-2AN50
Between ASM 410 and SLG
SSLG plug bent
Length: 5 m
10 m
20 m
6GT2 091-0DH50
6GT2 091-0DN10
6GT2 091-0DN20
SSLG plug straight
Length: 5 m 6GT2 091-2DH50
Between ASM 470/475 and SLG
SSLG plug bent
Length: 2 m
5 m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 091-0EH20
6GT2 091-0EH50
6GT2 091-0EN10
6GT2 091-0EN20
6GT2 091-0EN50
SSLG plug straight
Length: 2 m
5 m
10 m
50 m
6GT2 091-2EH20
6GT2 091-2EH50
6GT2 091-2EN10
6GT2 091-2EN50
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-88 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 3-21 Ordering data for MOBY cables
SLG stub line, fabricated
Between ASM 450/452/473 and SLG
SSLG plug bent
Length: 2 m (standard)
5 m
10 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 091-1CH20
6GT2 091-1CH50
6GT2 091-1CN10
6GT2 091-1CN20
6GT2 091-1CN50
SSLG plug straight
Length: 2 m 6GT2 091-2CH20
Stub line, 24 V
Stub line, 2-core for the 24 V DC power supply of the
ASM 400/401. Stub line is equipped with pin cable shoes
on both sides.
Length: 2 m
5 m
6GT2 091-0CH20
6GT2 091-0CH50
RS 232 stub line
Between PC and ASM 424
Length: 5 m
20 m
6GT2 391-0BH50
6GT2 391-0BN20
Cables, without plug connectors
SLG cable, without plug connector between ASM and SLG.
Type: 6 x 0,25 mm2
Length: 50 m
120 m
800 m
6GT2 090-0AN50
6GT2 090-0AT12
6GT2 090-0AT80
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
4-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Mobile Data Memories 4
4-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4.1 Introduction
MOBY identification systems ensure that useful data accompany a product
from the very beginning.
Mobile data memories are attached to the product or its conveyor or packag-
ing unit and are written, changed and read - all without contact. All impor-
tant information related to production and material flow control is located
right on the product.
A sturdy housing permits use in rugged environments and makes the MDS
resistant to many chemical substances.
The primary components of the mobile data memories (i.e., MDS) include
logic, antenna, FRAM, and RAM (with battery) or EEPROM.
When an MDS moves into the transmission field of the read/write device (i.e.,
SLG), the power supply unit generates and monitors the necessary power for all
switching elements. The pulse-coded information is conditioned for further
processing as purely digital signals. In addition to managing the various memo-
ries, the monitoring unit takes care of data handling and the test routines.
Table 4-1 Overview table of MDS (replacement parts not included in the table)
MDS Type Memory Size Temperature Range
(During Operation)
Dimensions
(L x W x H in mm)
Protection
Rating
MDS 401 8 (7)1 Kbyte FRAM –25 to +85 °CØ 30 x 10 IP67
MDS 402 8 (7)1 Kbyte FRAM –25 to +70 °C47.5 x 25 x 15 IP68
MDS 403 8 (7)1 Kbyte FRAM –25 to +85 °C47.5 x 25 x 15 IP68
MDS 404 8 (7)1 Kbyte FRAM –25 to +85 °C 50 x 50 x 20 IP68
MDS 506 32 (28)1Kbyte FRAM –25 to +70 °C 75 x 75 x 40 IP68
MDS 507 32 (28)1 Kbyte RAM –25 to +70 °C 125 x 75 x 40 IP65
MDS 514 32 (28)1 Kbyte FRAM –25 to +85 °C 50 x 50 x 20 IP68
MDS 439 E 8 (7)1 Kbyte EEPROM Up to +200 °C (cyclic) Ø: 114 x 83 IP68
1 Net capacity during ECC operation
Table 4-1 shows an overview of all current MDS types. See appendix D for a
complete table of all old and new MDSs. This table also specifies substitute
types for components which are no longer available.
Application area
Layout and
functions
Overview
Substitute types
Mobile Data Memories
4-3
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS
Proof of mechanical stability is provided by
oscillation test with variable frequency in acc.
w. part 2-6 of DIN IEC 68
Loading in succession in three vertical axes
SFrequency range
SAmplitude
SAcceleration
STest duration per axis
SSpeed of passage
10 to 500 Hz
1.5 mm (10 to 58 Hz)
20 g (10 to 500 Hz)
20 frequency cycles
1 octave/min.
Proof of mechanical stability via continuous
shock stress in acc. w. part 2-29 of
DIN IEC 68
STest conditions 50 g, 6 msec, 500 impacts per axis
Protection rating IP65/IP68 in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/
VDE 0470-1 1
Ambient temperature
SDuring operation
SDuring transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C (+85° C)
–40° to +70° C (+85° C)
Temperature gradient over storage tempera-
ture range in acc. w. part 2-4 of DIN IEC 68
Transition from 0° C to 70° C (85°C)
in 10 sec; duration 30 min;
Transition from 70° C (85° C) to 0° C
in 15 sec; duration 30 min; 100 cycles
Cleaning with water jet Max. of 5 min at max. water pressure
of 2 bar
1Definition of IP65
– Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof)
– Full protection against touch
– Protection against water jet
Definition of IP68
– Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof)
– Full protection against touch
– MDS can be continuously submerged in water. Contact manufacturer
for requirements.
Operational
requirements/
environmental
requirements
Mobile Data Memories
4-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4.2 MDS 401
Figure 4-1 MDS 401
Table 4-3 Ordering data for MDS 401
Mobile data memory MDS 401
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
6GT2 000-0CA10
Table 4-4 Technical data of MDS 401
Memory size 8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization Random access
MTBF (at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours
Battery None
Read cycles 1010 (at 25° C)
Programming cycles 1010 (at 25° C)
Data retention time 10 years
Read/write intervals See field data.
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Torsion and bending stress Not permitted
Direction dependency No
Securing of MDS Screws or glue
Protection rating in accordance with
DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1
IP67
Housing
SColor
SMaterial
SChemical resistance
– Resistant to
– Less resistant to
SDimensions in mm
Black
Macromelt (MM)
Caustic soda, cutting oil, transmis-
sion oil, cooler fluid, petroleum
Toluol, aceton, alcohol
Approx. Ğ 27 x 9
Ambient temperature
SDuring operation
SDuring transportation and storage
–25° to +85° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight Approx. 7 g
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-5
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-5 Field data of MDS 401
SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 41/
SLG 41-S
SLG 41C
Operating distance (Sa)2 to 8 2 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6
Limit distance (Sg) 10 8 10 10
Transmission window
SL: Vertical
S2L: Horizontal
–
–
–
–
30
50
20
40
Diameter of transmission window d = 18 d = 9 – –
Minimum distance from MDS to
MDS
> 50 > 50 > 80 > 80
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
Antenna side
Dimensional drawing
MDS 401
MOBY I
SIEMENS
27±0,2
22±0,2
9+0,5
7+0,5
Figure 4-2 Dimensions of MDS 401
Table 4-6 Decrease in field data with mounting of the MDS 401 on or in metal
Mouting position SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 41
Metal 100 % 95 % 60 %
Metal 70 % 75 % Not permit-
ted
Field data (in mm)
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mounting on metal
Mobile Data Memories
4-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
22,4
2
22,4
27,5
MDS 401
MOBY I
SIEMENS
27,4
55
45
40
4,2
∅27,5
5
∅32,2
3,5
1,5
22,4
7,6
9,7
7,6
Screws; Tightening
torque ≤ 0.8 Nm
Mounting plate
provided by the
customer
Mounting ring or washer
(provided by the customer)
Adhesive
Mounting of the MDS 401 from the front in pocket hole
Mounting of the MDS 401 from behind
Material: Plastic, fiber glass reinforced
(torsionally rigid plastic, e.g. ASI glass-fiber reinforced)
O-ring for sealing: O-ring NBR ∅ 2 mm
Outer diameter 32 mm
Inner diameter 28 mm
Shore hardness 70
Mounting of the MDS 401 from the front with cover (non-metallic)
Spacer
Length 8 mm
Recess for M4 screw
Adhesive
Figure 4-3 Ways to mount the MDS 401
Mounting methods
Mobile Data Memories
4-7
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5 5
Midpoint of MDS 401 transmission window
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
MDS 401
MOBY I
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 40
Midpoint of MDS 401 transmission window
View of top of
antenna head
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
MDS 401
MOBY I
SIEMENS
SLG 41
5
5
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
Midpoint of MDS 401
transmission window
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
MDS 401
MOBY I
SIEMENS
SLG 40
SLG 41-S
SLG 41C
Midpoint of MDS 401
transmission window
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
12
12
MDS 401
MOBY I
SIEMENS
Figure 4-4 Field midpoints of MDS 401
Note
The midpoint of the MDS 401 transmission window must be positioned ex-
actly over an SLG field midpoint.
Definition of the
field midpoints
Mobile Data Memories
4-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4.3 MDS 402
Figure 4-5 MDS 402
Table 4-7 Ordering data for MDS 402
Mobile data memory MDS 402
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
6GT2 000-0CA20
Table 4-8 Technical data of MDS 402
Memory size 8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization Random access
MTBF (at 40°C)1.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles 1010
Programming cycles 1010
Read/write intervals See field data.
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Direction dependency No
Securing of MDS 2 M3 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 0.7 Nm
Protection rating
SIn acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 IP 68/IP X9K
(steam jet: 150 mm;
10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75°C)
Housing
SColor
SMaterial
SDimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Gray
Polyamide 12
47.5 x 25 x 15
Ambient temperature
SDuring operation
SDuring transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
–40° to +70° C
Weight 25 g
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-9
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-9 Field data of MDS 402
SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 41/
SLG 41-S
SLG 41 C
Operating distance (Sa)2 to 8 2 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6
Limit distance (Sg) 10 8 10 10
Transmission window
SL: Vertical
S2L: Horizontal
–
–
–
–
30
50
20
40
Diameter of transmission window d = 18 d = 9 – –
Minimum distance from MDS to
MDS
> 50 > 50 > 80 > 80
a = 10 mm
Metal-free space
Dimensional drawing
Metal-free space with
flush installation
No distance to metal
required on this side
1 Perpendicular intervals of the mounting holes
3,5
47,5
17,5
25
40
4
15
12,5
13,5
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
a
a
1)
MDS 402
MOBY I
SIEMENS
1)
MDS 402
It is possible to mount the MDS
directly on metal. This may result in
reductions of the range of up to 20%.
Figure 4-6 Dimensions of MDS 402
Field data (in mm)
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5 5
Midpoint of MDS 402 transmission window
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Distance of field midpoins to
edge of SLG head
MDS 402
SLG 41
MOBY I
SLG 40
Midpoint of MDS 402 transmission window
View of top of
antenna head
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
MDS 402
SLG 40
5
5
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
Midpoint of MDS 402
transmission window
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
MDS 402
SLG 41-S
SLG 41C
Midpoint of MDS 402
transmission window
Midpoint of SLG transmission window
Distance of field midpoints to
edge of SLG head
12
12
MDS 402
Figure 4-7 Field midpoints of MDS 402
Note
The midpoint of the MDS 402 transmission window must be positioned ex-
actly over an SLG field midpoint.
Definition of the
field midpoints
Mobile Data Memories
4-11
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4.4 MDS 403
Figure 4-8 MDS 403
Table 4-10 Ordering data for MDS 403
Mobile data memory MDS 403
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
6GT2 000-1CF00
Table 4-11 Technical data of MDS 403
Memory size 8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization Random access
MTBF (without battery; at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours
Battery No battery
Read cycles 1010 (at 25° C)
Programming cycles 1010 (at 25° C)
Data retention time 10 years
Read/write intervals See field data.
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Direction dependency
SMax. angle deviation
Yes
" 45 °
Securing of MDS 2 M3 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 0.7 Nm
Protection rating
SIn acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 IP 68/IP X9K
(steam jet: 150 mm;
10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75°C)
Housing
SColor
SMaterial
SDimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Gray
Polyamide 12
47.5 x 25 x 15
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-12 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-11 Technical data of MDS 403
Ambient temperature
SDuring operation
SDuring transportation and storage
–25° to +85° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight 25 g
Table 4-12 Field data of MDS 403
SLG 41/
SLG 41-S/
SLG 41C
SLG 42 SIM 4x
Operating distance (Sa)4 to 15 10 to 30 0 to 25
Limit distance (Sg) 30 80 40
Transmission window (L x W) 65 x 25 110 x 50 80 x 45
Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 120 > 200 > 200
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
Field data (in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-13
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
3.5
47.5
17.5
40
4
15
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
a
a
1)
MDS 403
MOBY I
SIEMENS
Dimensional drawing
1)
1Right-angle distance
between the mounting holes
The arrow shows the direction
of movement and the orienta-
tion of the MDS to the SLG.
MDS 403
a
25
Metal-free space (see chap. 3.5.1)
a w10 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
With flush installation in metal the trans-
mission window is reduced by up to
40% (with a = 10 mm). However, the
working distance in table 4-12 can still
be used.
The MDS 403 can be mounted directly
on metal without noticeable reduction of
the field data.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Figure 4-9 Dimensions of MDS 403
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The transmission window is the basis for the configuration of communication
in dynamic mode.
Use the formula in chap. 3.1 to calculate the max. amount of data which can
be processed in dynamic operation.
MOBY I
MDS403
L x W = 65 x 25 [mm]
Direction of movement of the MDS
MDS 403 and SLG 41
Length (L)
Width (W)
L x W = 110 x 50 [mm]
MDS 403 and SLG 42
L x W = 80 x 45 [mm]
MDS 403 and SIM
MOBY I
MDS403
MOBY I
MDS403
MOBY I
MDS403
L x W = 65 x 25 [mm]
MDS 403 and SLG 41-S
Direction of movement of the MDS
Direction of movement of the MDS
Direction of movement
of the MDS
L x W = 65 x 25 [mm]
MDS 403 and SLG 41C
MOBY I
MDS403
Figure 4-10 Transmission window of the MDS 403
The transmission
window
Mobile Data Memories
4-15
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Figure 4-11 shows the complete transmission window of the MDS 403 with
the auxiliary lobes. Although auxiliary lobes are always present, they should
only be used in exceptional cases since their read distances are very limited.
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Main window
Auxiliary lobes
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Transmission hole
ÇÇ
Figure 4-11 Transmission window of the MDS 403 with auxiliary lobes
Exact information on the field geometry of the auxiliary lobes is not availa-
ble since the values vary widely depending on the particular working distance
and application.
Transmission
window with
auxiliary lobes
Mobile Data Memories
4-16 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4.5 MDS 404
Figure 4-12 MDS 404
Table 4-13 Ordering data for MDS 404
Mobile data memory MDS 404
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
including mounting frame
Replacement parts:
Mounting frame
6GT2 000-0EG00
6GT2 090-0CA10
Table 4-14 Technical data of MDS 404
Memory size 8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization Random access
MTBF (without battery; at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours
Battery None
Read cycles 1010
Programming cycles 1010
Read/write intervals See field data.
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Direction dependency No
Securing of MDS 2 M4 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 1.2 Nm
Protection rating
SIn acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 IP 68/IP X9K
(steam jet: 150 mm;
10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75°C)
Housing
SColor
SMaterial
SDimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Gray
Polyamide 12
50 x 50 x 20
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-17
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-14 Technical data of MDS 404
Ambient temperature
SDuring operation
SDuring transportation and storage
–25° to +85° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight 50 g
Table 4-15 Field data of MDS 404
SLG 41/
SLG41-S
SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SIM 41/42/43
Operating distance (Sa)0 to 12 0 to 12 0 to 30 0 to 50 0 to 20
Limit distance (Sg) 25 25 60 90 33
Transmission
window
SL: Vertical
S2L: Horizontal
36
72
30
60
90
180
140
260
60
80
Minimum distance
from MDS to MDS
> 90 > 90 > 250 > 500 > 200
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
50
46 50
40
MDS
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
aa
a
a
MDS can be mounted as
shown with the mounting
frame.
Metal-free space
a = 10 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
Mounting frame
Mounting diagram
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
919 16
+1 9
Figure 4-13 Dimensions of MDS 404
Field data (in mm)
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-18 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4.6 MDS 506
Figure 4-14 MDS 506
Table 4-16 Ordering data for MDS 506
Mobile data memory MDS 506
with 32-Kbyte RAM
6GT2 000-0DC00-0AA0
Table 4-17 Technical data of MDS 506
Memory size 32765-byte FRAM
Memory organization Random access
MTBF (at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours
Battery No battery
(starting with E of MDS)
Read cycles 1010
Programming cycles 1010
Read/write intervals See field data.
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Direction dependency No
Securing of MDS 2 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 2 Nm
Protection rating in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/
VDE 0470-1
IP68
Housing
SColor
SMaterial
SDimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Gray
Polyamide 12
75 x 75 x 40
Ambient temperature
SDuring operation
SDuring transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
–40° to +70° C
Weight 200 g
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-19
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-18 Field data of MDS 506
SLG 42 SLG 43 SIM 41/42/43
Operating distance (Sa) 101 to 35 201 to 100 0 to 25
Limit distance (Sg) 70 150 40
Transmission window
SL: Vertical
S2L: Horizontal
120
190
220
400
85
100
Minimum distance from MDS to
MDS
> 300 > 600 > 300
1 Underranging the minimum operating distance can cause a transmission gap in the
middle of the field. No communication with the MDS can take place in this transmis-
sion gap.
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
MDS can be mounted directly on metal although
this may reduce its range by up to 50%. This re-
duced range can be avoided by maintaining a di-
stance of h ≥ 20 mm to the metal.
a = 40 mm
Metal-free space
with flush installation
Metal-free space
Dimensional drawing
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Metal
h w 20 mm
a
a
a
a
40
2.5
75
65 3.5
∅5
75
65
Non-metallic
spacer
Figure 4-15 Dimensions of MDS 506
Field data (in mm)
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4.7 MDS 507 1
The MDS 507 data memories were designed for read and write-accesses from
great distances. They are equipped with a battery block containing 2 batter-
ies (i.e., the RAM battery and the dialog battery).
The RAM battery is used to buffer the RAM data and to turn on the MDS as
soon as it enters the transmission window of an active SLG.
The dialog battery is used to power the control logic of the MDS. Both bat-
teries are contained in a battery block. This battery block can be replaced via
plug-in contacts. The dialog battery is only activated when the MDS is lo-
cated in the transmission window of an SLG. Outside the transmission win-
dow, the dialog battery is in standby mode, and virtually no discharging takes
place.
When using the MDS 507, make sure that the SLG (presence) is switched off
after the MDS is processed or the MDS leaves the transmission window.
This will ensure long dialog battery life.
The MDS 507 can also be used with an SLG 42 or SLG 43 although its range
is reduced. It can also be used with the STG 4F.
Even with a dead dialog battery, the MDS 507 can still be processed with an
SLG 42/43 or an STG I. This provides the user with information on the
status of the dialog or backup battery.
The MDS 507 consists of a floor plate and the upper housing portion. The
upper housing portion contains the electronics and the batteries. Changing
the batteries is very simple with the plug-in contacts.
Floor plate and upper housing portion are held together with a snap-in catch.
The upper housing portion can be removed by opening the four catches. The
floor plate on the MDS carrier may remain in place (i.e., screwed in) while
the batteries are being changed.
Figure 4-16 MDS 507
1 Only available now as a spare part
Description
Physical layout
Mobile Data Memories
4-21
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-19 Ordering data for MDS 507
Mobile data memory MDS 507
with 32-Kbyte RAM
Configuring manual
SLG 44/MDS 507
German
English
6GT2 000-0DC01-0AA0
On “Software MOBY” CD
Accessories (order separately)
Magnet holder for MDS 5071
Replacement battery1
6GT2 090-0PA00
6GT2 094-0AA0
1 Only available now as a spare part
Table 4-20 Technical data of MDS 507
MDS 507
Memory size 32 Kbytes
Memory type RAM
Memory organization Random access
MTBF (without battery; at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours
Battery life span
SAt 25° C (continuous temperature)
SAt 70° C (continuous temperature)
Approx. 10 years
Approx. 6 years
Life span of dialog battery
S15-min processing time/day
S5-min processing time/day
S< 1 min processing time/day
Approx. 2 years
Approx. 5 years
Approx. 10 years
Battery for data backup Yes
Battery for dialog with SLG Yes
Read cycles Unlimited
Programming cycles at 70° C (min.) Unlimited
Programming cycles at 40° C (typical) Unlimited
Read/write intervals See field data.
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Direction dependency Ye s
Maximum angle deviation "45°
Securing of MDS 4 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 2 Nm
Protection rating IP65
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-22 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-20 Technical data of MDS 507
MDS 507
Housing
SColor
SMaterial
SDimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Gray
Polyamide 12
125 x 75 x 40
Ambient temperature
SDuring operation
SDuring transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
–40° to +70° C
Weight 330 g
1 Discontinued
Table 4-21 Field data of MDS 507
SLG 44
Operating distance (Sa)100 to 800
Limit distance (Sg)> 1000
Transmission window
SL (at Sa)
SW (at Sa)
1200
300
Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 4000
Note
Using the field data specified here, the MDS 507 can be configured without
any special knowledge. However, more complex configurations require the
exact transmission window as described in chapter 3.6.
Field data (in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-23
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
75
65
125
115
5.5
40
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
a
a
a
15
78
128
a > 40 mm
Metal-free space
with flush installation
Mounting on a non-
metallic spacer can
be omitted.
M5 threaded socket
Material:
Polyamide
Foam rubber pad
(2.5 mm)
Dimensional drawing
Metal-free space
Magnet holder
Figure 4-17 Dimensions of MDS 507
Mounting screws and washer for the MDS are not included.
The magnet holder can be used in all situations in which the MDS must be
removed very quickly from one object and affixed to another.
Using the foam rubber pad, the MDS magnet holder can be placed directly on
painted iron surfaces.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-24 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4.8 MDS 514
Figure 4-18 MDS 514
Table 4-22 Ordering data for MDS 514
Mobile data memory MDS 514
with 32-Kbyte FRAM
including mounting frame
Replacement parts:
Mounting frame
6GT2 000-0DG10
6GT2 090-0CA10
Table 4-23 Technical data of MDS 514
Memory size 32765-byte FRAM
Memory organization Random access
MTBF (without battery; at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours
Battery No, starting with D of MDS
Read cycles 1010
Programming cycles 1010
Read/write intervals See field data.
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Direction dependency No
Securing of MDS 2 M4 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 1.2 Nm
Protection rating
SIn acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 IP 68/IP X9K
(steam jet: 150 mm;
10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75°C)
Housing
SColor
SMaterial
SDimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Gray
Polyamide 12
50 x 50 x 20
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-25
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-23 Technical data of MDS 514
Ambient temperature
SDuring operation
SDuring transportation and storage
–25° to +85° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight 50 g
Table 4-24 Field data of MDS 514
SLG 41/
SLG 41-S
SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SIM 41/42/43
Operating distance
(Sa)
0 to 12 0 to 12 0 to 30 0 to 50 0 to 20
Limit distance (Sg) 25 25 60 90 33
Transmission
window
SL: Vertical
S2L: Horizontal
36
72
30
60
90
180
140
260
60
80
Minimum distance
from MDS to MDS
> 90 >90 > 250 > 500 > 200
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
50
46 50
40
MDS
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
aa
a
a
MDS can be mounted as
shown with the mounting
frame.
Metal-free space
a = 10 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
Mounting frame
Mounting diagram
9
5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
919 16
+1
Figure 4-19 Dimensions of MDS 514
Field data (in mm)
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-26 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
4.9 MDS 439 E
This heat-proof data memory can be used when processes expose the data
memory to temperatures in excess of 85° C but less than 220° C. Its IP68
protection rating ensures reliable service under rugged operating conditions.
The MDS is dimensioned so that it can be secured both on a skid and directly
on a chassis.
Some typical applications are listed below.
SPriming, KTL area and cataphoretic dip coating with the related drying
chambers
SSurface painting and related drying chambers
SWashing at temperatures > 85° C
SOther applications with higher temperatures
Figure 4-20 MDS 439 E
Table 4-25 Ordering data for MDS 439 E
Mobile data memory MDS 439 E
with 8-Kbyte FRAM
Order separately:
Holder
Short version
Covering hood
Description - MDS 439 E
German
English
6GT2 000-0CD30-0AD0
6GT2 090-0QA00
6GT2 090-0QB00
6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA1
6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA2
Table 4-26 Technical data of MDS 439 E
Memory size 8189-byte FRAM
Memory organization Random access
MTBF (at 40° C) 2.5 x 106 hours
Battery No
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-27
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 4-26 Technical data of MDS 439 E
Read cycles in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/
VDE 0470-1
Unlimited
Write cycles
SAt 70° C (min.)
SAt 40° C (typ.)
10000
109
Read/write intervals See field data.
Shock150 g
Vibration15 g
Direction dependency No
Hazardous area approval No
Protection rating in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/
VDE 0470-1
IP68
Housing
SColor
SMaterial
SDimensions (∅ x H) in mm
Brown
Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS)
114 x 83
Ambient temperature
SPermanent operation
SCyclic operation
STransportation and storage
–25° to +100° C
–25° to +220° C
–40° to +110° C
Weight 900 g
Silicone free Yes (all materials)
1 Applies only when used with original holder
Table 4-27 Field data of MDS 439 E
SLG 42 SLG 43 SIM
41/42/43
Operating distance (Sa) 101 to 55 201 to 80 0 to 25
Limit distance (Sg) 70 125 33
Transmission window
SL: Vertical
S2L: Horizontal
120
210
190
330
75
100
Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 500 > 600 > 300
1 Underranging the minimum operating distance can cause a transmission gap in the
middle of the field. No communication with the MDS can take place in this transmis-
sion gap.
The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS.
Field data (in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-28 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7
114 ± 0,5
Mounting edge
Antenna side
11
11
83 + 3
61 + 1
+1
+ 1
Figure 4-21 Dimensional drawing of MDS 439 E
96
25
11
234
140 100
Short version (6GT2 090-0QA00)
Material: stainless sheet steel (chrome-nickel steel)
with thickness of 2.5 mm
Figure 4-22 Holder of the MDS 439 E data memory
Antenna side of
the MDS
Covering hood, optional
(6GT2 090-0QB00)
27
51.5
Figure 4-23 Assembly of MDS 439 E with holder
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-29
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The holder includes all mounting materials and a drawing. Mounting screws
(diameter of M10 and minimum length of 25 mm) to secure the holder are
not included. The mounting screws have a diameter of M10. The minimum
length is 25 mm. The optional covering hood can be used for the long and
short version of the holder.
!Caution
We strongly recommend only using the MDS with its original holder. Only
this holder can ensure that the MDS adheres to the values specified for
shock, vibration and temperature. A protective cover is recommended for
use in painting applications.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
a
a = 40 mm
SThe MDS holder has
no effect on the
metal-free space.
SThe optional protec-
tive cover has no ef-
fect on the metal-free
space.
Sectional drawing
No special metal-free
space is required on the
upper half of the MDS (i.e.,
above the holder).
Figure 4-24 Metal-free space for MDS 439 E
Mobile Data Memories
4-30 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
At ambient temperatures > 110° C, it must be ensured that the interior tem-
perature of the MDS does not exceed the critical threshold of 110° C. Each
heat-up phase must be followed by a cool-down phase. Some limit cycles are
listed in the following table.
Table 4-28 Limit cycles of MDS 439 E
Tu (Heat-Up) Heating Up Tu (Cool-Down) Cooling Down
220° C 0,5 h 25° C> 2 h
200° C1 h 25° C> 2 h
190° C1 h 25° C> 1 h 45 min
180° C2 h 25° C> 5 h
170° C2 h 25° C> 4 h
Calculation of a temperature profile is available from Siemens on request.
Note
For further configuration notes, see chapter 3.7 or the description of
MDS 439 E (6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA2).
Cyclic MDS opera-
tion at tempera-
tures > 110° C
Mobile Data Memories
5-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices 5
5-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5.1 Introduction
The read/write devices (i.e., SLGs) provide inductive communication with
the mobile data memories (i.e., MDSs) and the serial link to the interfaces
(i.e., ASMs).
Various SLG models – for short, medium and long distances to the MDS –
are available to meet customer requirements.
The SLG executes commands received from the interface. These commands
for reading and writing data are converted via a modulator/demodulator cir-
cuit.
Communication between MDS and SLG takes place via inductive alternating
fields.
The amount of data which can be transferred between SLG and MDS de-
pends on the factors listed below.
SThe speed at which the MDS moves through the transmission window of
the SLG
SThe length of the transmission window
SThe type of MDS (i.e., RAM, FRAM, EEPROM)
Table 5-1 Overview table of the SLG
SLG Type Operating
Distance Sa
(Depending on
MDS)
Limit Distance SgTemperature
Range
(During
Operation)
Dimensions
(WxHxD) in mm
Protection
Rating
SLG 40 2 to 8 mm 10 mm –25 to +70° C∅ 30 x 54 (head) IP65
SLG 40-S 2 to 6 mm 8 mm –25 to +70° C∅ 18 x 30 (head) IP65
SLG 41/41-S 0 to 15 mm 25 mm –25 to +70° C120 x 40 x 40 IP65
SLG 41C/41CC 0 to 15 mm 25 mm –25 to +70° C55 x 75 x 30 IP67
SLG 42 0 to 55 mm 70 mm –25 to +70° C75 x 40 x 75 IP65
SLG 43 0 to 100 mm 150 mm –25 to +70° C238 x 40 x 80 IP65
SLG 44 100 to 800 mm 1000 mm –25 to +70° C238 x 40 x 80 IP63
Application area
Layout and func-
tions
Overview table
Read/Write Devices
5-3
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5.2 SLG 40
The SLG 40 is extremely suited for use on small assembly lines. The short
installation distance between several SLG 40 antennas is a special feature.
With the 2 included screw nuts, the antenna head can be positioned with ex-
treme precision for each application.
Figure 5-1 Read/write device SLG 40
Table 5-2 Ordering data for SLG 40
Read/write device SLG 40
up to 10 mm (low power), incl. screw nuts
Accessories:
SLG plug connector and stub lines
Mounting clamp
6GT2 001-0EA10
See chapter 3.10
3SX6 284
Table 5-3 Technical data of SLG 40
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.)
Transmission frequency
SPower
SData
19200 baud
10 mm (see field data table)
134 kHz
1.81 MHz
Serial interface to ASM
Transmission speed
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
19200 baud, RS 422
360 m
Supply voltage
(via serial interface)
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
Idle/operation
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
25 mA/90 mA
MTBF 2 x 106
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices
5-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 5-3 Technical data of SLG 40
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
For antenna head (∅ x threading x L)
For electronics w/o plug (WxHxD)
Color Antenna
SLG housing
Material Antenna
SLG housing
Plug connection
M30 x 1.5 x 54
125 x 40 x 75
Anthracite with orange head
Ergo-gray
“Crastin”
Polyamide 12
DIN 43651
Protection rating
Antenna and SLG housing
Shock
Vibration
IP65
50 g
20 g
Mounting of SLG
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
4 M5 screws
v 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.) 215 g
Certifications EN 300 330
FCC Part 15
UL/CSA
Applicable for MDS 402/401
Table 5-4 Field data of SLG 40
Operating distance (Sa)2 to 8 mm
Limit distance (Sg)10 mm
Median deviation (Ld)18 mm (+ 9 mm from middle)
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) Da w 50 mm
Db w 80 mm
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 40
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Field data
FCC information
Read/Write Devices
5-5
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Ld
View of top
Ld
sg
sa
Field at Sa = 2 mm
Field at Sa = 8 mm
View of side
Figure 5-2 View of the antenna
Transmission window:
To ensure reliable data communication, the antenna of the MDS must be
positioned within this field. A diameter of Ld = 18 mm can be configured for
the operating distance (2 to 8 mm).
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
aMOBY I
SLG 40
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
b
a
a = 10 mm
b = 10 mm
Metal-free space with flush
installation
Note:
The limit and operating distances
are reduced when the metal-free
space is not adhered to.
Figure 5-3 Metal-free space for SLG 40
30
29
36
58
18
19,5
30
42,5
Figure 5-4 Mounting diagram and dimensions of SLG 40 with mounting clamp
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Optional mounting
clamp
Read/Write Devices
5-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Db
Da
Da w 50 mm
Db w 80 mm
The SLG electronics can be mounted directly
next to each other.
Figure 5-5 Distance D for SLG 40
75
65
125115
5.5
54
M30
21
40
36
MOBY I
SLG 40
MOBY I
SLG 40
Antenna head
Anti-kink cable protector, flexible
in all directions
Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable length 0.5 m
Screw nuts
Antenna side
Top view of antenna head
Figure 5-6 Dimensional diagram of SLG 40
Definition of
distance D
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices
5-7
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5.3 SLG 40-S
The SLG 40 is extremely suited to use in small assembly lines. The short
installation distance between several SLG 40-S antennas is a special feature.
With the 2 included screw nuts, the antenna head can be positioned with ex-
treme precision for each application.
Figure 5-7 Read/write device SLG 40-S
Table 5-5 Ordering data for SLG 40-S
Read/write device SLG 40-S
up to 8 mm (low power), incl. screw nuts
SLG plug connector and stub lines
6GT2 001-0EB00
See chapter 3.10
Table 5-6 Technical data of SLG 40-S
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
For antenna head (∅ x threading x L)
For electronics w/o plug (L xW x H)
Color Antenna
SLG housing
Material Antenna
SLG housing
Plug connection
M18 x 1.0 x 30
75 x 75 x 40
Anthracite with orange head
Ergo-gray
“Crastin”
Polyamide 12
DIN 43651
Protection rating
Antenna and SLG housing
Shock
Vibration
IP65
50 g
20 g
Storage temperature
Operation temperature
–40° to +85° C
–25° to +70° C
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices
5-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 5-6 Technical data of SLG 40-S
Operating voltage
Current
consumption Idle
Operation
17 to 30 V DC
25 mA
90 mA
Serial interface RS 422
Transmission speed 19200 baud
Max. cable length (cf. chap. 3.10.1; stan-
dard cable)
360 m
MTBF 2 x 106
Transmission frequency
SPower
SData
134 kHz
1.81 MHz
Mounting of SLG
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
4 M5 screws
v 2 Nm
Mounting of SLG head (included) 2 nuts (M18 x 1.0)
Weight (approx.) 200 g
Certifications EN 300 330
FCC Part 15
UL/CSA
Applicable for MDS 401/402
Table 5-7 Field data of SLG 40-S
Operating distance (Sa)2 to 6 mm
Limit distance (Sg)8 mm
Diameter of transmission window (Ld)9 mm
Median deviation " 4.5 mm from middle
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) Da w 50 mm
Db w 80 mm
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 40S
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Field data
FCC information
Read/Write Devices
5-9
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Ld
Ld
sg
sa
View of top
Field at Sa = 2 mm
Field at Sa = 8 mm
View of side
Figure 5-8 View of the antenna
Transmission window:
To ensure reliable data communication, the antenna of the MDS must be
positioned within this field.
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
aMOBY I
SLG 40-S
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
b
a
a = 10 mm
b = 10 mm
Metal-free space with flush
installation
Note:
The limit and operating distances
are reduced when the metal-free
space is not adhered to.
Figure 5-9 Metal-free space for SLG 40-S
Db
Da
Da w 50 mm
Db w 80 mm
The SLG electronics can be mounted directly
next to each other.
Figure 5-10 Distance D for SLG 40-S
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Definition of
distance D
Read/Write Devices
5-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
30
50
24
MOBY I
75
65
5
5
75
5.5
18
25
Antenna head
Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions
Minimum bending
radius: 20 mm
Cable length 0.5 m
Screw nuts
Antenna side
Top view of antenna head
M18
Fine threading
Pitch 1.0
SLG 40-S
Figure 5-11 Dimensional diagram of SLG 40-S
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices
5-11
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5.4 SLG 41/SLG 41-S
The SLG 41 is a low-end read/write device. It is particularly suitable for use
when the MDS conveyor system (e.g., pallets) can be physically positioned
relatively precisely. The swivel head of the SLG 41 makes it very adaptable
to the transportation system.
In dynamic operation, only a small amount of data can be read or written
between SLG 41 and MDS.
In contrast to the SLG 41, the antenna of the SLG 41-S is rotated by 90° in
the swivel head so that all positions of the transmission window can be im-
plemented.
Figure 5-12 SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Table 5-8 Ordering data for SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Read/write device up to 25 mm
SLG 41
SLG 41-S (antenna turned 90°)
SLG plug connector and stub lines
6GT2 001-0AA00
6GT2 001-0AA00-0AX0
See chapter 3.10
Table 5-9 Technical data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed 19200 baud
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.) 30 mm (see field data table)
Transmission frequency
SPower 134 kHz
SData 1.81 MHz
Serial interface to ASM 6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
Transmission speed 19200 baud, RS 422
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
360 m
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices
5-12 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 5-9 Technical data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Idle/operation 20 mA / 90 mA
MTBF 2 x 106
Housing
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 120 x 40 x 40
Color Anthracite/ergo-gray
Material Crastin
Plug connection DIN 43651
Protection rating IP65
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Mounting of SLG 4 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 3 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation –25° to +70° C
During transportation and storage –40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.) 210 g
The exact field data are dependent on the type of MDS used.
Table 5-10 Field data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Operating distance (Sa)0 to 15 mm
Limit distance (Sg)30 mm
Median deviation (L) Depends on MDS
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 200 mm
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Field data
FCC information
Read/Write Devices
5-13
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SIEMENS
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
M
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
M
SIEMENS
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
M
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
M
Transmission window at operating distance
Length of
transmission
window (L)
SLG 41-S
Transmission win-
dow at operating
distance
Length of trans-
mission window
(L)
Figure 5-13 Transmission window of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
a
aa
a
a
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
a
aa
a
a
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
a = 25 mm
Metal-free space
with flush installation
a = 25 mm
Metal-free
space with flush
installation
Figure 5-14 Metal-free space for SLG 41/SLG 41-S
D
D
SLG 41 / SLG 41-S
SLG 41
SLG 41
Figure 5-15 Distance D for SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Definition of
distance D
Read/Write Devices
5-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Position of
swivel head
on delivery
Position of
swivel head
on delivery
40
8040
5.3 60
25
28
4049
40 30
14.5
SIEMENS
40
8040 25
28
4049
SLG 41:
SLG 41-S:
5.3 60
40 30
14.5
SIEMENS
Figure 5-16 Dimensional diagram of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
SLG 41
SLG 41-S
Figure 5-17 Read head changes of SLG 41/SLG 41-S
Dimensions
(in mm)
Possible read head
changes with the
swivel head
Read/Write Devices
5-15
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5.5 SLG 41C/SLG 41CC
The SLG 41C is a low-end read/write device. It is small and compact and is
excellent for use in small assembly lines.
The high protection rating and use of high-quality materials ensure that the
SLG 41C can easily handle even most rugged industrial conditions.
It is connected with a 3-m cable which is equipped with core sleeves at the
end. This connection line can be extended with terminals or a user-provided
connection plug. This connection plug of the ASM is used for the connection
to the ASM.
The cable length of the SLG 41CC is 2 m. The end of the cable is equipped
with a twin M-12 plug. This can be used to connect the SLG 41CC directly to
an ASM 450/452/473.
Figure 5-18 SLG 41C/41CC read/write device
Table 5-11 Ordering data of SLG 41C/41CC
Read/write device SLG 41C
SLG 41CC read/write device with
twin M-12 plug
Accessories:
Extension cable (not fabricated)
Connection plug for ASM 450/473
6GT2 001-0AC00
6GT2 001-0AC00-0AX0
6GT2 090-0A...
6GT2 090-0BC00
Table 5-12 Technical data of SLG 41C/41CC
Inductive interface to MDS
Read/write distance, SLG-MDS, max.
Transmission frequency
Power
Data
30 mm (see field data)
134 kHz
1.81MHz
Serial interface to evaluation unit
Data transmission rate
Line length, ASM-SLG max. (for 24V DC)
RS 422
19 200 Baud
360 m
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices
5-16 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 5-12 Technical data of SLG 41C/41CC
Serial interface to user
SLG 41C
SLG 41CC
3 m connection line;
open end
2 m connection line;
twin M-12 plug for
ASM 450/452/473
Voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption at room temerature
Standby
Operation
24 V DC
20 V to 30 V DC
30 mA
70 mA (typical)
Housing
Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm
Color
Material
Connection
55 x 75 x 30
Gray
Plastic (polyamide 12)
3 m connection line, cable ends
with core sleeves and labels
Protection rating an acc. w. EN 60 529
Shock
Vibration
IP67
50 g
20 g
Mounting of SLG
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
4 M 5 screws
< 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transpostation and storage
–25°C to +70°C
–40°C to +85°C
Weight approx. 210 g
Read/Write Devices
5-17
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 5-13 Field data of SLG 41C/41CC
MDS 401/402 MDS 403 MDS 404/514
Working distance (Sa)0 to 6 4 to 15 0 to 12
Limit distance (Sg) 10 30 25
Transmission window
SL: Vertical
S2L: Horizontal
20
40
65
–
30
60
Width of transmission window (W) 8 25 12
Minimum distance from
SLG to SLG w200 w200 w200
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41C/41CC
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment.
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Field data (in mm)
FCC Information
Read/Write Devices
5-18 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The transmission window
is marked on the housing
Length of the transmission window for (L)
MDS 404/514
Length of the transmission window (L)
for MDS 401/402
12
12
5
5
M
M
M
Transmission window
at working distance
20
30
B = 25
Width of the
transmission window
L = 65
Length of the
transmission window Transmission window
at working distance
The MDS moves along the
“SIEMENS” label on the
housing.
M
SIEMENS
M
Lenght of the transmisison window for
MDS 403
M
Figure 5-19 Transmission window of SLG 41C/41CC
Transmission
window
Read/Write Devices
5-19
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
a = 15 mm
Metal-free area with flush installation
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
a
a
a a
Figure 5-20 Metal-free area of SLG 41C/41CC
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG
D = ≥ 200 mm
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
D
D
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
Figure 5-21 Distance D: SLG 41C/41CC
Metal-free space
Definition of
distance D
Read/Write Devices
5-20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Core and sleeves
Flexible cable
anti-kink guard
Core color Designation
Brown – Receiving
Pink + 24 V
Gray Ground (0V)
Green + Sending
Yellow – Sending
White + Receiving
Black Cable shield
45 55
75
65
w30
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41CC
5
5
∅5
45 55
75
65
w30
3 m
0,1 m
55
30
SIEMENS
MOBY I
SLG 41C
2 m
5
5
∅5
3
4
Figure 5-22 Dimensions of SLG 41C/41CC
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices
5-21
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5.6 SLG 42
The SLG 42 is a middle-of-the-line read/write device. With its larger an-
tenna, the SLG 42 generates a much larger field than the SLG 41, and a
greater range can be achieved with the same data memories. In dynamic op-
eration, larger amounts of data can be read from and written to the MDS.
See chapter 3.4.
Figure 5-23 SLG 42 read/write device
Table 5-14 Ordering data for SLG 42
Read/write device SLG 42
up to 70 mm (medium power)
SLG plug connector and stub lines
6GT2 001-0BA00
See chapter 3.10
Table 5-15 Technical data of SLG 42
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.)
Transmission frequency
SPower
SData
19200 baud
70 mm (see field data table)
134 kHz
1.81 MHz
Serial interface to ASM 6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
Transmission speed 19200 baud, RS 422
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
120 m
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Idle/operation 60 mA/180 mA
MTBF 2 x 106
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices
5-22 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 5-15 Technical data of SLG 42
Housing
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 75 x 40 x 75
Color Gray
Material Polyamide 12
Plug connection DIN 43651
Protection rating
Shock
Vibration
IP65
50 g
20 g
Mounting of SLG
Tightening torque (at room temperature)
2 M5 screws
v 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25° to +70° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.) 250 g
Silicone free Yes
The exact field data depend on the type of MDS used.
Table 5-16 Field data of SLG 42
Operating distance (Sa)0 to 55 mm
Limit distance (Sg)70 mm
Median deviation (L) Depends on MDS
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 800 mm
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 42
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Field data
FCC information
Read/Write Devices
5-23
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
MM
Length of
transmission
window (L)
Transmission window
at operating distance
Figure 5-24 Transmission window of SLG 42
a = 30 mm
Metal-free space with
flush installation
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
a
a
a
a
Figure 5-25 Metal-free space for SLG 42
D
D
SLG 42
SLG 42
SLG 42
Figure 5-26 Distance D: SLG 42
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Definition of
distance D
Read/Write Devices
5-24 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5
75 75
40
2.5
65
25
49
5
3.5
∅5
Figure 5-27 Dimensional diagram of SLG 42
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices
5-25
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5.7 SLG 43
The SLG 43 is a high-performance read/write device. This SLG is particu-
larly suitable for use with large MDS types (i.e., MDS 506/MDS 439 E). The
size of its transmission window is one of its primary features. The physical
tolerances of conveyor systems can be well compensated for with this trans-
mission window. In dynamic operation, the large transmission window per-
mits large amounts of data to be read from or written to the MDS. See chap-
ter 3.4.
Figure 5-28 Read/write device SLG 43
Table 5-17 Ordering data for SLG 43
Read/write device SLG 43
up to 150 mm (high power)
SLG plug connector and stub lines
6GT2 001-0CA10
See chapter 3.10
Table 5-18 Technical data of SLG 43
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed 19200 baud
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.) 150 mm (see field data table)
Transmission frequency
SPower 134 kHz
SData 1.81 MHz
Serial interface to ASM 6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
Transmission speed 19200 baud, RS 422
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
85 m
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range 21 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Idle/operation 60 mA/250 mA
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices
5-26 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 5-18 Technical data of SLG 43
MTBF 2 x 106
Housing
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 238 x 40 x 80
Color Gray
Material Polyamide 12
Plug connection DIN 43651
Protection rating IP65
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Mounting of SLG 4 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 2 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation –25° to +70° C
During transportation and storage –40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.) 800 g
Silicone free Yes
The exact field data depend on the type of MDS used.
Table 5-19 Field data of SLG 43
Operating distance (Sa)0 to 100 mm
Limit distance (Sg)150 mm
Median deviation (L) Depends on MDS
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 2000 mm
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 43
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Field data
FCC information
Read/Write Devices
5-27
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Transmission window at
operating distance
Length of
transmis-
sion window
(L)
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
MM
Figure 5-29 Transmission window of SLG 43
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ba
a > 50 mm
b > 30 mm
b
a
Metal
h w 20 mm
Although the SLG can be mounted directly on metal, the range may be reduced
by up to 30%.
This can be avoided by maintaining a distance of H > 20 mm to the metal.
Metal-free space with
flush installation
Non-metallic
spacer
Figure 5-30 Metal-free space for SLG 43
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Read/Write Devices
5-28 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SLG 43
SLG 43
SLG 43
D
D
Figure 5-31 Distance D: SLG 43
80
60
40
30
238
13
5
5.5
225
25 49
212
Figure 5-32 Dimensional diagram of SLG 43
Definition of
distance D
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices
5-29
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
5.8 SLG 44 1
The SLG 44 permits the MDS 507 data memory to be processed reliably
from a great distance.
This combination of SLG/MDS is particularly suitable for use in systems in
which positioning to the MDS cannot be performed precisely at all or a long
distance between SLG and MDS is required for safety reasons.
The large transmission window between SLG and MDS opens up further ap-
plication areas. In dynamic operation, large amounts of data can be trans-
ferred since the MDS remains in the transmission window for a long period
of time.
In addition, MDS 507 can still be processed with SLG 44 even at top speeds
of 120 km/h.
Figure 5-33 Read/write device SLG 44
Table 5-20 Ordering data for SLG 44
Read/write device SLG 44
up to 1000 mm (long range)
Configuration manual
SLG 44/MDS 507
German
English
SLG plug connector and stub lines
6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0
On “Software MOBY” CD
See chapter 3.10
1 Only available now as spare part
Application area
Ordering data
Read/Write Devices
5-30 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 5-21 Technical data of SLG 44
Inductive interface to MDS
Data transmission speed
Read/write distance
SLG to MDS (max.)
Transmission frequency
SPower
SData
19200 baud
1000 mm (see field data table)
No power
1.81 MHz
Serial interface to ASM
Transmission speed
Line length, ASM to SLG (max.)
at 24 V DC
6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 43651
19200 baud, RS 422
270 m
Supply voltage (via serial interface)
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range
Current consumption
Idle/operation
20 to 30 V DC
70 mA/110 mA
MTBF 2 x 106
Housing
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 238 x 40 x 80
Color Gray
Material Polyamide 12
Plug connection DIN 43651
Protection rating IP63
Shock 50 g
Vibration 20 g
Mounting of SLG 4 M5 screws
Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 3 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation –25° to +70° C
During transportation and storage –40° to +85° C
Weight (approx.) 770 g
Technical data
Read/Write Devices
5-31
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The exact field data depend on the type of MDS used.
Table 5-22 Field data of SLG 44
MDS 507 with SLG 44
Operating distance (Sa)100 to 800
Limit distance (Sg)v 1000
Transmission window L 1200
Transmission window B (at Sa) 300
Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 6000
Interference-prone environments (e.g., frequency converters) may reduce the
sensitivity of the SLG and thus affect the field data. See chapter 3.6.5.
The field data are valid for a supply voltage of 24 V DC and a temperature
range of 0° to 50° C.
The field data may be reduced when temperatures are higher or lower.
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
SLG 44
MDS 507
MOBY I
SLG 44
Caution:
Watch polarization direction.
See also chap. 3.6.
Width of
transmission
window (B)
Length of transmission window (L)
Direction of movement
of MDS
Identification of field
midpoint on SLG
Polarization direction
Figure 5-34 Transmission window of SLG 44
Field data
Transmission
window
Read/Write Devices
5-32 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ba
a > 80 mm
b > 40 mm
b
a
MOBY I
SLG 44
Polarization direction
Metal-free space with
flush installation
Metal
Non-metallic
spacer
h w 20 mm
To reduce interference caused by the metal construction of the system, we recommend
placing the SLG 44 on a non-metallic spacer with a height of at least 20 mm. Mounting
on metal does not noticeably reduce the limit distance of the SLGs.
Figure 5-35 Metal-free space of SLG 44
SLG 44SLG 44
SLG 44
D
D
MOBY I
SLG 44
MOBY I
SLG 44
MOBY I
SLG 44
Polarization direction
Polarization direction
Polarization direction
Figure 5-36 Distance D: SLG 44
Metal-free space
Definition of
distance D
Read/Write Devices
5-33
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
40±5
80
60
40
30
238
13
10
5
5,5
225
18
25
MOBY I
SLG 44
Identification of field
midpoint or polarization
direction
Polarization direction
All dimensions in mm
Potentiometer to set sensitivity
of the SLG (see chap. 3.6.5)
LEDs for
operation indicator
Figure 5-37 Dimensional diagram of SLG 44
Yellow:
Interference on SLG or MDS in boundary area.
The LED also goes on briefly when the SLG performs a power startup.
Green:
MDS is in the field. The LED flashes in accordance with the parameterized
time tABTAST.
Dimensions
(in mm)
LEDs for operation
indicator
Read/Write Devices
5-34 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Read/Write Devices
6-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces 6
6-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.1 Introduction
ASM interfaces provide the link between MOBY I components (i.e., SLGs
and MDSs) and higher level controllers (e.g., SIMATIC S5/S7), PCs or com-
puters. Up to four SLGs can be connected depending on the interface used.
An ASM consists of a microcontroller system with its own program stored on
a PROM. The CPU receives commands via the user interface and stores
these in the RAM. The user receives an acknowledgment that the command
has arrived. When the command is correct, the CPU begins execution.
Application area
Layout and func-
tions
Interfaces
6-3
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-1 Overview of the interfaces
ASM
Type
Interfaces to
PC/Compu-
ter
Interfaces to
SLG
Function
blocks
SLG
Connec-
tions
Dimensions
(WxHxD in
mm)
Temperature
Range
(During
operation)
Protec-
tion
Rating
ASM
400/401
Can be instal-
led S5-115 to
155U
9-pin sub D
socket
FB 250/252
FB 230
1 per CM
4 per
ASM
0 to+55 °C IP00
ASM 410 Can be
installed in
S5-100U/
ET 200U
Can be con-
nected via
bus module
opt.: FB 41
for ASM 410
2 (multi-
plex)
45 x 135 x 100 0 to+60 °C IP20
ASM 424 RS 232
RS 422
9-pin sub D
socket
MOBY-API 4
(parallel)
205 x 130 x 60 –25 to +55° C IP40
ASM 450 PROFIBUS
DP
2 5-pin
proximity
switch plug
connectors
FB 240
FC 44
2 (multi-
plex)
134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55° C IP67
ASM 452 PROFIBUS
DPV1
2 5-pin
proximity
switch plug
connectors
FC 45
FB 246
FC 46,
FC 56
2 (pseudo
parallel)
134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55° C IP67
ASM 454 PROFIBUS
DPV1
9-pin sub D
socket
FC 45 4
(parallel)
205 x 130 x 60 –25 to +55° C IP40
ASM 456 PROFIBUS
DP/DPV1
8-pin
proximity
switch plug
connector
FC 45 2
(parallel)
60 x 210 x 30 0 to +55° C IP67
ASM 470 Can be
installed in
S7-300/
ET 200M
Via screw
terminals
FC 47
FB 47
2 (multi-
plex)
40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60° C IP20
ASM 473 Can be instal-
led in
ET 200X
2 5-pin
proximity
switch plug
connectors
FC 45
FC 56
187 x 110 x 55 0 to +55° C IP67
ASM 475 Can be instal-
led in
S7-300/
ET 200M
via screw
terminals
FC 45
FC 56
2
(parallel)
40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60° C IP20
RF170C Can be
installed in
ET 200pro
2 M12 plug
connectors
FC 45
FC 55
FC 56
2
(parallel)
90 x 130 x 60 –25 to +55° C IP67
SIM V.24,
RS 422,
TTY
(Integrated) 3964R
Driver
75 x 75 x 40 0 to +60° C IP54
Overview
Interfaces
6-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.2 ASM 400/401
6.2.1 Overview
ASM 400/401 interfaces can be directly installed and operated in the follow-
ing SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers.
SS5-155U/F (all CPUs)
SS5-135U (all CPUs)
SS5-155U/H (all CPUs)
ASM 400/401 interfaces consist of the basic module in double Europe format
and the CM 422 or CM 423 channel submodule. The basic module can be
equipped with one to four channel submodules. Mixed configuration is not
permitted.
The ASM 400 with the CM 422 operates in the I/O area of the SIMATIC S5.
When used with function block FB 250, up to 32 channel submodules (i.e.,
eight 4-channel interfaces) can be operated in one SIMATIC. When FB 252
is used, the maximum number of channel submodules is increased from 32 to
96 per SIMATIC S5. All MDS models can be processed via the FBs. The
user addresses the data on the MDS via a command table in the data block.
The user addresses user data via absolute addresses.
Using the “dialog” function, two ASMs can exchange data via the SLG.
The ASM 401 with the CM 423 operates in the page-frame area of the
SIMATIC S5. If appropriately configured, the ASM 401 can be used as a
communications processor. The ASM 401 uses function block FB 230. Up
to 255 submodules (i.e., 1020 channel submodules) can be addressed on one
SIMATIC S5.
The data on the MDS are addressed by files with logical names (i.e.,
filehandler).
Application area
Layout and
function
ASM 400
ASM 401
Interfaces
6-5
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SLG SLG SLG SLG
STG 4F
MDS MDSMDS MDS
ASM 400/401*
with channel submo-
dule CM 422/CM 423*
* With filehandler
Figure 6-1 Configurator of ASM 400/401
Communication time between ASM 400 and user depends on two factors.
SCycle time and type of programmable controller
SSoftware used (i.e., FB 230 and FB 250)
Communication between ASM 400 and user can be divided into three steps.
SThe user issues a command and starts it. The next time the FB is called,
the command is transferred to the ASM and acknowledged by the ASM.
SThe ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user or the FBs are
in wait status. Data communication with the MDS begins as soon as an
MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are
stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness.
SASM communication with the MDS is concluded. When the FB is called
the next time, the data which have been read or written are transferred
from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message.
Communication
between ASM 400
and user program
Interfaces
6-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-2 Ordering data for ASM 400/401
Interfaces ASM 400/401
consisting of basic module
and channel module CM 422/CM 423
Basic module
with connection to STG 4F, with 4
insertion slots for channel module
CM 422/CM 423, without channel
module, mixed configuration
not permitted
Channel module CM 422
Channel module CM 423
MOBY software1
with FB 230/250
ASM-SLG stub lines
(see also chap. 3.10)
6GT2 002-0AA00
6GT2 002-0AB00
6GT2 002-1AB00
6GT2 080-2AA10
6GT2 091-0A...
Accessories:
Plug connector, ASM side
9-pin submin D plug connector
with screw lock for
customer cable making
S1 each
S10 each
6GT2 090-0BB00
6GT2 090-0BB10
Description-ASM 400/401
German
English
Description-FB 230 for ASM 401
German
English
Description-FB 250 for ASM 400
German
English
electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chap. 7.1.
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-7
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-3 Technical data of ASM 400/401
Channel Submodule CM 422 CM 423
Serial interface to SLG
Plug connector
Max. interface/line length
No. of SLGs
RS 422
9-pin sub D socket
RS 422/1000 m, depending on SLG type
1 SLG per CM
Software functions
Programming With STEP5 function block
Commands
Dialog operation
FB 250
Read data, write data,
initialize MDS
Access directly via
addresses
Yes
FB 230
Create file, read, write,
delete, format MDS etc.
Access via filehandler
(similar to DOS)
No
Supply voltage 5/24 V DC via internal bus
Interfaces ASM 400/401
Interfaces for CM/SLG
ASM 400 (max.)
ASM 401 (max.)
Interface to STG 4F
Interface for 24 V DC
2 CM 422s
4 CM 423s
(mixed configuration not permitted)
RS 422, 9-pin sub D socket
2-pin plug connector (included)
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Internal (at 5 V)
External (at 24 V)
5/24 V DC
4.75 to 5.25 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption (max.)
Internal (at 5 V)
External (at 24 V)
Fine-wire fuse
1 channel
2 channels
3 channels
4 channels
1 channel
2 channels
3 channels
4 channels
M 1.25 A/250 V
370 mA
490 mA
610 mA
730 mA
400 mA
800 mA
1200 mA
1600 mA
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
Rel. humidity at 25° C
Space requirements
Weight (approx.)
ASM 400/401
CM 422/CM 423
0° to +55° C
–20° to +70° C
< 95%
1 SEP (1 SEP = 15.24 mm)
0.44 kg
0.1 kg
Technical data
Interfaces
6-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Function block FB 250 controls data transmission between the STEP5 pro-
gram and the ASM 400 interface module.
FB 250 can be used on the following “programmable controllers.”
S115U/F-CPU 941/942/943/944/945
S135U-R/S-CPU 928/928B
S155U/H-CPU 948
FB 250 does not use system commands. All MDSs can be processed with
FB 250.
Primary functions of FB 250
SConvert data from user parameterization structure to structure of an ASM
SAll communication with the ASM via command and data exchange
SPreparation of errors for the user error handling: Command repetition
Chaining of several partial commands into one complete command
SReading and writing with a user command
SAny address areas of a mobile data memory can be processed with one
command.
SControl of PLC cycle load via the user
Data transmission between FB and MDS can be divided into three phases.
SSupply interface with the appropriate command and the data or parame-
ters
STransmit the data between ASM 400 and MDS
SSupply S5 with appropriate parameters or data from the interface
If the P address area is not available, FB 252 also supports operation of the
ASM 400 in the expanded Q address area.
Function block
FB 250
Interfaces
6-9
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
By using the filehandler management system, the ASM 401 interface module
simplifies data management of the mobile data memory for users of MOBY I
identification systems. The filehandler appears to the user as an MDS operat-
ing system. It offers the following advantages (similar to the DOS filehand-
ler management system).
SThe user addresses user data via logical names (i.e., file names) which
can consist of up to 8 alpha-numerical characters. This eliminates abso-
lute addressing of the data.
SRelated data are called files.
SManagement of differing file lengths
SSpecification of access rights to files
SCreate/delete/read/write (etc.) files
A function block (i.e., FB 230) has been created so that the SIMATIC user
can take advantage of the filehandler.
Since this function block uses system commands, the following function
blocks have been created for the PLCs listed below.
SFB 230/234 for PLC 115U
SFB 231 for PLC 135U
SFB 232 for PLC 155U
SFB 235 for PLC 155U
(QUEUE-read command added)
When the filehandler is used, the amount of user data on the MDS is reduced.
The filehandler stores various management data on the MDS (e.g., system
area, directory, and file allocation table). The following table shows how
much user data is still available to the user.
Table 6-4 Storage capacity of the mobile data memories when the filehandler is
used
MDS Type Operating Mode Max. Number of
Files
User Data
62-byte RAM 01
02
81
Without
Without
With
ECC
ECC
ECC
1
2
1
27
12
7
128-byte
EEPROM
03
83
Without
With
ECC
ECC
3
3
60
45
2-Kbyte RAM 04
84
Without
With
ECC
ECC
16
16
1680
1440
8-Kbyte
EEPROM
05
85
Without
With
ECC
ECC
32
32
7456
6464
32-Kbyte RAM 06
86
Without
With
ECC
ECC
64
64
31488
27520
Function block
FB 230 for
ASM 401
Interfaces
6-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.2.2 Hardware Description
+ 24 Volt
GND
Channel
module
no. 1
Channel
module
no. 2
Channel
module
no. 3
Channel
module
no. 4
Metal front plate
Connection plug for the STG 4F service
and test device
3 LEDs per channel:
Red LED
Yellow LED
Green LED
9-pin sub D socket
Screw for con-
nection of chan-
nel module to ba-
sic module for
EMC operation
Plug Connector Assign-
ment to SLG or STG 4F
Pin Designation
Not used
+ Sending
+ Receiving
Not used
– Receiving
– Sending
Ground (0 V)
+24 V
Not used
Cable shield
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Hous.
Connection plug for SLG
9-pin sub D plug connector
with screw-type lock,
order no. 6GT2 090-0BB00
24 Volt plug connector
(This plug connector is
included with the ASM.)
Attention: STG I (see chap. 7.3) cannot
be connected here.
Figure 6-2 Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400/401
Plug connectors
and their assign-
ment
Interfaces
6-11
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
x x
Switch 1
ON = 1
OFF = 0
ON = 1OFF = 0
18 8 1
1
1 4
2
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
X20
1 and 2 must
always be
jumpered on
X20.
Switch 2
Switch 3
Switch 4
Plug connector for
SIMATIC bus
Figure 6-3 Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400/401
S4 = Setting of the type of addressing
S2 = Setting of the page frame number
S3 = Setting of the module address (linear addressing with PESP)
S1 = Address setting when PESP is not used
Table 6-5 Use of page frame addressing for FB 230
Page
Frame
S4 S3 S2 S1 S1
KH KY 1 2 4321 87654321 8765 4321
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
.
.
FD
FE
FF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
.
253
254
255
OFF ON Not used 11111111
11111110
11111101
11111100
11111011
11111010
11111001
11111000
11110111
...
...
00000010
00000001
00000000
1111
1111
1111
1111
1111
1111
1111
1111
1111
...
...
1111
1111
1111
Not
used
Switches and
plug-in jumpers
Address
settings
Interfaces
6-12 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-6 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252
ASM 400/401 Switch Setting FB 250 Parameteri-
zation
FB 252 Parameteri-
zation
Start
Address
of ASM
Switch
S3
4 3 2 1
Switch
S4
2 1
ADR KAN* QADR KAN
00 0 0 0 0 1 01 - 4
16 0 0 0 1 (This
tti
16 (Cor-
responds
32 0 0 1 0
(
setting
of switch 32 respon
d
s
to chan-
48 0 0 1 1
of switch
4 must
l
Not 48
to chan
nel
module
64 0 1 0 0 always
be used
Not
available 64 mo
d
u
l
e
1 to 4)
80 0 1 0 1
be used
when the
module
80
1 to 4)
96 0 1 1 0 module
is o
p
er- 96
112 0 1 1 1
is oper-
ated in
standard
112
128 1 0 0 0 standard
mode.
)
128 1 - 4 128
144 1 0 0 1
mode
.
)
144 (Cor-
responds
144
160 1 0 1 0 160 respon
d
s
to chan- 160
176 1 0 1 1 176
to chan
nel
module
176
192 1 1 0 0 192 mo
d
u
l
e
1 to 4) 192
208 1 1 0 1 208
1 to 4)
208
224 1 1 1 0 224 224
240 1 1 1 1 240 240
Interfaces
6-13
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
EPROM
CPU
80C32
Plug-in jumper X20
Hybrid for
serial interface
X21 not jumpered
EPROM
CPU
80C32
Plug-in jumper X20
Hybrid for
serial interface
X21 jumpered
CM422 for ASM 400 CM423 for ASM 401
Plug-in jumper X20:
SRemoved:
Normal operation
SInserted:
Test operation; dialog to the mobile data memory is aborted earlier when malfunctions
occur. This helps to pinpoint weak spots and malfunctions during commissioning.
Figure 6-4 Settings on the channel module
Note
The CM 422 cannot be upgraded to CM 423 or vice versa. In addition to
jumper X21, several hardware changes must be made.
Settings on the
channel module
Interfaces
6-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-5 CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-6 CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-7 CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-0LA
(S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-0LB
(S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-1 (S5-115U)
Interfaces
6-15
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-8 CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-9 CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U)
MOBY interface modules ASM 400 and ASM 401 cannot be used.
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
MODY interface module ASM 4011
ASM 314, AS 310, IM 317
IM 307 or IM 317
(only starting with ER 701-3LA13)
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each
ASM 400/401 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-10 ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-2 (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-3 (S5-115U)
Module rack
ER 700-0,
ER 701-1 and
ER 701-2
Module rack
ER 701-3
Interfaces
6-16 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Figure 6-11 S5-135U/155U central controller
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Figure 6-12 S5-155U/155H central controller
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Interface 312-3
Interface 310 or 314
Figure 6-13 S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/155U
Central controller
S5-135U/155U
Central controller
S5-155U/155H
Expansion device
S5-183U
Interfaces
6-17
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Interface 312-5
Figure 6-14 S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Interface 314
Figure 6-15 S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
MODY interface module ASM 401
Interface 312-5
Figure 6-16 S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U
Expansion device
S5-184U
Expansion device
S5-185U
Expansion device
S5-187U
Interfaces
6-18 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.3 ASM 410
Interface ASM 410 can be used in the SIMATICs listed below.
SS5-90U (max. of 2)
SS5-95U (max. of 4)
SS5-100U (max. of 8)
SET 100U (max. of 2)
SET 200U (max. of 4)
Since the ASM can be used with all mobile data memories, read/write de-
vices and the STG 4F service test device, compatibility with all MOBY I
components is ensured.
LEDs for status and error indications are located on the front. Interference-
immune design is provided by the galvanic isolation of the MOBY I interface
to the SIMATIC S5 bus. The MOBY commands are started and data are
fetched by setting and scanning a few control bits in the process image (PIO/
PII), and eight input/output bytes are assigned. In time-multiplex operation,
one or two SLGs can be used. The MDS data are accessed via their absolute
addresses.
STG 4F
SLG SLG
MDS
SIEMENS SIEMENS
Bus module of
PLC S5-100U
with ASM 410
MDS
Figure 6-17 Configurator for the ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5
Application area
Layout and
function
Interfaces
6-19
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-7 Ordering data for ASM 410
Interface ASM 410
SIMATIC S5, bus module for 2 ASMs with
Screw connection
Crimp connection, with crimp contacts
Stub lines for ASM - SLG
See also chap. 3.10
6GT2 002-0BA00
6ES5 700-8MA11
6ES5 700-8MA22
6GT2 091-0D...
Description-ASM 410
German
Englisch
electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Table 6-8 Technical data of ASM 410
Serial interface to SLG RS 422
Connection (max.) 2 SLGs 4x can be connected via a sepa-
rate bus module.
Line length (typ. max.) 1000 m/RS 422, depending on SLG and
type of cable
Number of SLGs
SStatic operation
SDynamic operation
Interface to STG 4F
Interface for 24 V DC
2 SLG 4x
1 SLG 4x
RS 422, 9-pin sub D plug connection
Via a separate bus module
Software functions
Programming
Commands
Dialog operation
With STEP5 directly via process image
(PIO/PII); no function block required; 5
bytes processed per command
Optional: FB 41 for ASM 410. This FB is
available on the “MOBY Software”
floppy disk. Description is provided by
FB 250 documentation.
Select channel 1 or 2, read MDS, write
MDS, initialize MDS, etc.
Yes
Supply voltage
Nominal value 24 V DC (residual ripple, max. of 10%)
Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Internal (at 5 V) Typical
Max.
20 to 60 mA
(20 mA = long cycle time)
(60 mA = short cycle time)
110 mA (PLC in STOP status)
External (at 24 V DC)
All SLGs switched off 90 mA
Power consumption, typ. (without SLG) 2.5 W
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-8 Technical data of ASM 410
Cooling Convection cooling
Isolation group C in acc. w. VDE 0110
Protection rating IP20 in acc. w. IEC 529
Physical stress IEC 68-2-27
Ambient temperature
During operation
SHorizontal SIMATIC layout
SVertical SIMATIC layout
0° to +60° C
0° to +40° C
During transportation and storage
Dimensions (W x H x D)
–25° to +70° C
45 x 135 x 100 mm
Weight (approx.) 0.25 kg
PLC S5-90U provides a maximum of four slots for additional modules. Up
to two of these can be used by the ASM 410 module.
The ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-95U in slots 0 to 7. Up to
four modules can be used on one PLC.
Starting with CPU release status -8MA-3, 8 modules can be used.
The ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-100U in slots 0 to 7. Up to
eight modules can be used on one PLC. See the following table for slot-
oriented addressing.
S5-100U
012345 678
64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120
to
71 to
79 to
87 to
95 to
103 to
111 to
119 to
127
Slot number
Address assignment
Free slots for additional
digital modules
Slot in PLC S5-90U
Slot in PLC S5-95U
Slot in PLC
S5-100U
Interfaces
6-21
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The ASM 410 must be operated as an analog module in the ET 100U. When
parameterizing the module with the “COM ET 100U” software, the module
must be specified with “4AX” in the appropriate slot. The ASM 410 oc-
cupies eight input bytes and eight output bytes (i.e., 16 bytes). Since a maxi-
mum of 32 bytes can be assigned per ET 100U in the address image of the
main controller, a maximum of two modules per ET 100U are permitted.
When other modules are used with an ET 100U in addition to the ASM 410,
only one MOBY I module can be connected.
On the ET 100U, the ASM 410 can be addressed via all address areas of the
PLC (i.e., P, Q, IM3 and IM4).
C
P
U
ET 100U
Central controller S5-135 U
S5-155 U
ET 100U
SIMATIC
DI DO DO
S5-115 U
ASM 410
Max. of 2 ASM 410s
per ET 100U
Max. of 32 ET 100Us
Max. cable length
3000 m
Figure 6-18 Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U
The ASM 410 can be used with the ET 200U under the following conditions.
SThe ET 200U with an ASM 410 installed must be operated in slow mode.
See ET 200U manual for how to set slow mode.
SThe “COM ET 200U” software is used to parameterize the ASM 410.
The ASM 410 module must be parameterized there with “095”.
SUp to four ASM 410s can be used with one ET 200U. When DI/DO or
other periphery is used with the ET 200U, fewer ASM 410s can be used.
Otherwise the same conditions as for the ET 100U apply.
Configuration of
ASM 410 in
ET 100U
Configuration of
ASM 410 in
ET 200U
Interfaces
6-22 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The ASM 410 interface has the same dimensions as any standard module for
the SIMATIC S5-100U. The interface can be installed directly on the bus
module (6ES5 700-8MA11 or 6ES5 700-8MA21).
A2
A3
A1
B1
B2
B3
MOBY I
6GT2 002-0BA00
123456
5
1
6
9
STG
123
LEDs
Betriebsart
8
9
6
res.
0
2
468A
C
E
A
B
Anschaltmodul
ANW
aktiv
Fehler
1.SLG
2.SLG
Power
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
normal
ECC
Test+ECC
INIT norm
INIT ECC
res.
res.
Testbetr.
1.SLG
2.SLG
F
TEST
bzw.
Ventilation slits of the adapter cap-
sule: Make sure the ventilation slits
are not obstructed during operation.
Forced module ventilation is not re-
quired.
Label insert:
Short texts in English are
on the back.
Status and error LEDs
Operating mode selection switch
Plug connector for serial S5 bus
9-pin sub D plug connector for
connection of STG 4F with stub line
6GT2091-0B...
(screw-type lock)
Coding pin (not visible; on back of
module) in position “h” (i.e., analog
module)
10-pin plug connector for bus mo-
dule (24 V supply; SLG connection)
Attention: STG I (see chap. 7.3)
cannot be connected here.
Figure 6-19 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements
Physical layout
Interfaces
6-23
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-9 Status and error LEDs of ASM 410
No. Color Meaning
A1 Red Error: The last command was concluded with an error, or the
hardware of the module is defective.
A2 Yellow Rapid irregular flashing indicates running dialog with the SLG or
mobile data memory (MDS). This LED is always on when the
presence check is enabled.
A3 Green Data memory is in the field of the SLG. The SLG which detected
the MDS is indicated via LEDs B1-B2. LED is only active when
presence check is being used.
B1 Green B1 = 1st SLG is in operation.
Remember:
Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 or B2) may be on at a time. If both
LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG.
B2 Green B2 = 2nd SLG is in operation.
Remember:
Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 or B2) may be on at a time. If both
LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG.
B3 Green B3 = power on
This LED is always on when 24 V is applied to the module. The
interface module can be tested with the STG.
The operating mode is set with the operating mode selection switch on the
front of the ASM.
Setting of the operating mode:
ASM 410 uses the serial S5 bus. The STG interface is switched off.
Test operation with the STG:
Telegrams from the S5 are no longer processed.
Note
The serial S5 bus functions are not affected by switching to test operation
since this interface has its own microprocessor and is not dependent on
MOBY activities.
Setting the
operating mode
Positions 0 to 7
Positions 8 to F
Interfaces
6-24 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-10 Operating modes for ASM 410
Switch
Setting
Short Descrip-
tion on Label
Insert
Description
0 Normal Normal operating mode; read and write all MDS types;
ECC driver is disabled.
1ECC driver Read and write all MDS types; EEC driver is enabled.
2Test operation All MDS types can be processed during test operation.
The ASM 410 performs stricter error checks for com-
munication with the MDS so that weak points and
malfunctions can be detected during commissioning.
3Test + ECC The ECC driver is enabled. Otherwise same as switch
setting 2.
4INIT normal Initializes the MDS. When a write command is started
via the process image, an INIT command to the MDS
is started. The contents of the MDS are deleted.
5INIT ECC Initializes the MDS with ECC driver. Otherwise same
as switch setting 4.
6 Reserved –
7 Reserved –
8Test 1st or 2nd
SLG
An STG can be connected via the 9-pin sub D plug
connector so that all MOBY I hardware can be tested.
9 to F Reserved –
Interfaces
6-25
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B U S M O D U L E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1st SLG
2nd SLG
Gn
+24 V
0 V
Shield
From exter-
nal power
supply
Stub line incl. SLG plug connector and open end with core
sleeves 6GT2091-0D...2
Mounting rail
Terminal strip on bus module
Cable shield
Color ID3 for stub
lines from Siemens
Ye
Wh
Br
Pk
Gr
Gn
Ye
Wh
Br
Pk
Gr
1 Maximum cable length depends on the SLG and the tolerance of the external 24 V supply.
2 Lengths as per table 3-21
3 Color ID
Gr = green = pin 4 in SLG plug connector; Ye = yellow = pin 5 in SLG plug connector;
Wh = white = pin 6 in SLG plug connector; Br = brown = pin 1 in SLG plug connector;
Pk = pink = pin 2 in SLG plug connector; Gr = gray = pin 3 in SLG plug connector
Max. cable length = 1000 m1
Figure 6-20 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410
Wiring of one or
two SLGs
Interfaces
6-26 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.4 ASM 450/452
The ASM 450/452 interfaces are modules for operation of MOBY devices
via PROFIBUS DP / DPV1 on the following components.
SAll computers and PCs
SAll controllers
When the interfaces are used on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are available
to the user.
Figure 6-21 ASM 450/452 interface
The ASM 450 accesses data on the MDS directly with physical addresses.
The ASM 450 uses cyclic operation with function block FB 240 (S5) or
FC 44 (S7). Appendix B of the FC 44 description is available to the
SIMATIC S5 user. All other users must use the description of the FC 44
function for the ASM 450.
Up to 2 SLGs can be connected to one ASM 450. Connection of two SLGs is
only recommended when static operation is used. When MDSs are processed
while passing by (i.e., dynamic operation), there is usually not enough time
to switch over the second SLG.
Application area
ASM 450
Interfaces
6-27
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The ASM 452 is the further development of the familiar ASM 450/451
interface modules. Use of non-cyclic data communication on
PROFIBUS DPV1 ensures that optimum data throughput is achieved even
with large PROFIBUS configurations. The minimum cyclic data load of the
ASM 452 on PROFIBUS guarantees the user that other PROFIBUS stations
(e.g., DI/DQ) can continue to work at very high speeds.
Up to 2 SLGs can be run on the ASM 452 in pseudo parallel mode. Pseudo
parallel mode means that the user can start one command on 2 SLGs at the
same time (via FC 45) although the ASM has only one serial channel. The
ASM automatically handles the multiplexing between SLG 1 and SLG 2.
The SLG is processed on which an MDS happens to be. This delays the
processing of the second MDS. For this reason, we recommend only
processing the MDS statically when 2 SLGs are connected to the ASM. The
MDS data are accessed via physical addressing of the MDS. The SIMATIC
S7 offers FC 45 for this purpose. FC 45 gives the S7 user an easy-to-use
interface with powerful commands (e.g., one command processes an entire
MDS; command chaining; S7 data structures with UDTs).
The ASM 452 can also be parameterized as a dialog station. Only 1 SLG can
be used on channel 1 in this mode.
The available memory (VMDS) is 1280 bytes.
The MOBY I filehandler is also implemented on the ASM 452. The filehand-
ler is a DOS-like file management system of the MOBY I identification sys-
tem. It consists of a progam which is executed on the interface module.
FC 46 or FC 56 (S7) or FB 246 (S5) are available to SIMATIC users.
On PROFIBUS the ASM 452 exclusively uses non-cyclic mode via DPV1.
This provides excellent data throughput.
The ASM 452 can be used in an ASM 451-compatible mode if you turn
switch 8 to OFF (see figure 6-30).
This means the GSD file siem804d can continue to be used.
Note
This mode only applies to systems which use the ASM 452 as a direct substi-
tute for the discontinued ASM 451.
ASM 452
ASM 452 in
ASM 451 mode
Interfaces
6-28 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-11 Ordering data for ASM 450/452
ASM 450 interface
for PROFIBUS DP,
max. of 2 SLGs connectable
ASM 452 interface
for PROFIBUS DPV1,
max. of 2 SLGs connectable
6GT2 002-0EB00
6GT2 002-0EB20
Accessories
Plug connector for PROFIBUS DP connection
and 24 V power supply
Connection cable, ASM 450/452 ´ SLG
2-m in length (standard); for other lengths see
chapter 3.10.4.
Opt. connection plug,
ASM 450/452 ´ SLG
M12 covering caps for unused SLG connec-
tion (only ASM 450 and ASM 452)
1 package = 10 each
MOBY software 1
with FB 246, FC 46, FC 56, FB 240, FC 44,
FC 45, GSD file
Other accessories for ASM 450/452
(network components)
6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0
6GT2 091-1CH20
6GT2 090-0BC00
3RX9 802-0AA0
6GT2 080-2AA10
See SIMATIC catalog ST 70 and
SIMATIC ET 200X manual.
Replacement part:
Plug connector plate; T-functionality for
PROFIBUS connection
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0
Description-ASM 450/FC 44
German
English
French
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-ASM 451/FC 46
German
English
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-FC 56 (filehandler)
German
English
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-FC 45 (for ASM 452)
German
English
French
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description-FB 246 for ASM 451 with S5
German Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chapter 7.1.
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-29
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-12 Technical data of ASM 450/452
ASM 450 ASM 452
(Normal Addressing)
ASM 452
(Filehandler)
Serial interface to the user PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DPV1 PROFIBUS DPV1
Procedure in acc. w. EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS
Connection PG 11 screw connection
PROFIBUS and supply voltage plug connectors are not included.
Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic recognition)
Max. block length 208 bytes 2 words cyclic/
240 bytes acyclic
2 words cyclic/
240 bytes acyclic
Serial interface to the SLG
Plug connector 2 coupling plug connectors (M12)
Line length (max.) 1000 m, depends on SLG
(2 m = standard length, other cables: see chap. 3.10.4)
SLGs which can be connected 2 SLG 4x (multiplex
operation)
2 SLG 4x (pseudo paral-
lel mode)
1 SLG 4x
Software functions
Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master
Function blocks
SIMATIC S5 FB 240 –FB 246 (for 155U with
IM 308-C)
SIMATIC S7 FC 44 FC 45
(Normal addressing)
FC 46
(filehandler, no multitag)
FC 56
(filehandler, with and
without multitag)
MDS addressing Direct access via
addresses
Direct access via
addresses
Access via file system si-
milar to DOS
Commands
Dialog:
Normal Station/VMDS
Initialize MDS, read data
from MDS, write data to
MDS, and so on
Yes/no
Initialize MDS, read data
from MDS, write data to
MDS, and so on
Yes/yes
(Only 1 SLG can be used
on channel 1 in VMDS
mode.)
Format MDS, read file,
write file, and so on
No/no
Dialog: memory size VMDS –1280 bytes –
Supply voltage
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption 180 mA (without SLG, DO not loaded)
Technical data
Interfaces
6-30 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-12 Technical data of ASM 450/452
ASM 452
(Filehandler)
ASM 452
(Normal Addressing)
ASM 450
Digital inputs
Number 2 None None
Galvanic isolation Ye s
Input voltage
For logical “0” 0 to 5 V DC
For logical “1” 13 to 30 V DC
Input current for signal “1” 7 mA (typ.)
Delay time < 10 msec
Digital outputs
Number 2 None None
Galvanic isolation Ye s
Max. permissible current 0.5 A
Short-circuit protection Yes (electronic)
Line length (max.) 30 m
Ambient temperature
During operation 0° to +55° C
During transportation and sto-
rage
–40° to +70° C
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 134 x 110 x 55 (without bus plug)
Mounting 4 M5 screws, mounting on any plate or wall
Weight (approx.) 0.5 kg
Protection rating IP67
Interfaces
6-31
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
MDS MDS
2nd SLG
(not for filehandler)
PROFIBUS DP
master module
(e.g., S7-400 CPU)
1st SLG
PROFIBUS cable
To additional
PROFIBUS
stations
AT-comp. PC
24 V for
ASM
and
SLGs
* Standard cable length
2 m*
Figure 6-22 Configurator of ASM 450/452
The ASM 450/452 is equipped with the same housing as the ET 200X decen-
tral I/O device. See ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA00-8AA0) for
general technical information on the ASM 450/452 (e.g., mounting, operation
and wiring, and general technical specifications). Accessories and power
supply components are also described in this manual.
The ASM 450/452 is integrated in the hardware configuration with a GSD
file. The ASM can then be configured via HWCONFIG of the SIMATIC
Manager or another PROFIBUS tool. The “Software MOBY” CD contains a
separate GSD file for each ASM model.
The GSD file describes the permissible modes of the ASM 452. The hard-
ware configuration tool (e.g. STEP 7 HW-Config) is used to set the mode.
Since an SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets on the
ASM 450/452, a prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.10) makes it
easy to connect the SLG. In its standard version, the connection cable has a
length of 2 m. For other cable lengths, see chapter 3.10.4.
An SLG plug connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who
want to make their own cable (see figure 6-23). Cable and SLG plug connec-
tor can be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
Hardware
description
PROFIBUS
configuration
Operating mode
of ASM 452
SLG connection
technique
Interfaces
6-32 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SLG-cable: 6GT2 090-0Ajjj
PG11 screw connection, max. cable dia-
meter = 6.5 mm (Do not tighten screw until
plug connector is assembled.)
2 screws to open
the plug connec-
tor
Coupling connector
M12 on ASM
1
2
3
4
5
6
S
S
Connector
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
S
S
Core
Color
Green
White
Brown
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Not conn.
Shield
Connection to
Pin of SLG
connector
4
6
1
5
3
2
-
Plug hood removed
Protection
rating IP67
50
18.5
Figure 6-23 Connection plug, ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00)
6
1
4
5
3
2
Two 5-pin, round M12
plug connectors
X1/2
X1/3
X1/1
X1/4
X2/3
X2/1
X1/5
X2/5
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
SLG plug
connector (socket)
2 m
* Standard cable length
*
X1 X2
25
18,5
Figure 6-24 Connection cable, ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20)
Interfaces
6-33
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The ASM 450/452 can also be used with the “green” PROFIBUS cable.
Make sure that a 24 V cable is installed from X12 to X13. The 24 V line on
plug X12 can be connected to pin 5, 6.
X13 X11
X12
X13 X11
X12
Figure 6-25 PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power
PROFIBUS cable
with 24 V power
Interfaces
6-34 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SLG - SLG 2xDA SLG
- SLG 2xDE SLG SLG
x1 x2
x3 x4
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th *
* This configuration only applies to static processing
of the MDS.
x1 – x2
x3 – x4
SLG
-
1st
x1 – x2
x3 – x4
SLG - SLG
- SLG SLG
1st 2nd 3rd *
x1 – x2
x3 – x4
Config
Plug
Config
Plug
Config
Plug
Filehandler Normal
addressing
Figure 6-26 SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452
The versions shown in figure 6-26 can be set up with the standard cables of
MOBY or ET 200X.
Note
Although the configuration with 2 SLGs + DI + DO is also possible with the
ASM 450, the components require special customer-related wiring.
The following figure shows a dimensional drawing of an ASM 450/452 with
bus connection plugs. You must add the length of the PG screw connection
and the radius of the cable used to the total width and depth specified.
110
90
53.5 28.25
134
120
Ø 5.5
Figure 6-27 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452
SLG and DI/DO
configuration for
ASM 450/452
Dimensional
drawing of
ASM 450/452 with
mounting holes
Interfaces
6-35
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The following figure shows the pin allocation of the ASM 450/452.
1
2
3
4
5
654
32
1
X1 X2
X3 X4
654
654
32
1
32
1
X11
X12
X13
SF
BF
ON
DC 24 V
LEDs for MOBY and ASM 452
RxD: SLG with command active
PRE/ERR 1, MDS present or error
PRE/ERR 2: indication for each SLG.
(“MDS present” always takes priority.
The error indication only appears
when no MDS is present.)
MDS present:
The LED is permanently ON. If more
than one MDS is in the field, the
number of MDSs is indicated by brief
interruptions of the light.
No error output is made.
Error indication:
The LED is permanently OFF. The last
error no. is indicated by brief pulses
of light.
SLG 1: SLG 1 is selected.
SLG 2: SLG 2 is selected.
Only SLG 1 or SLG 2
can be selected at one time.
RxD
ERR ANW
ASM 450
ASM 452
1
2
3
4
5
654
321
X1 X2
X3 X4
654
654
321
321
X11
X12
X13
SF
DC 24 V
RxD
PRE/ERR 2
SLG2
RxD
SLG1
BF
ON
PRE/ERR 1
SLG1
SLG2
RxD
DI0 DI1
LEDs for MOBY and ASM 450
RxD: SLG active
ANW: MDS present
or status of DA1
ERR: Error indication
or status of DA0
SLG1/2: Indicates the selected SLG. Only
SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected.
DI0/1: Status of the digital inputs
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
SF: System fault (see table 6-13)
BF: Bus fault (see table 6-13)
ON: On when the logic voltage is present
on ASM (is generated from the
24 V suply voltage)
DC 24 V: On when the 24 V supply voltage is
connected to ASM
1 +RxD
2 +TxD
3 -TxD
4 -RxD
5PE
Socket
X11 and X12
(PROFIBUS DP)
Pin Allocation
1 Signal B (red)
2PE
3* PE
4 Signal A (green)
5* L+
6* M
X13
(Supply voltage)
1PE
2L+
3M
4PE
5L+
6M
* Do not circuit
Pin Allocation (SLG)
Socket
X1/X3
X2 X4
+ 24 V
DI1
0 V
DI0
PE
X2/X4
1 + 24 V
2 DO1
30 V
4 DO0
5PE
Figure 6-28 Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452
Pin allocation
Interfaces
6-36 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-13 LED indication for PROFIBUS diagnosis
LED
“BF”
LED
“SF”
Cause of Error Error Handling
On * SASM is starting up. –
SConnection to the DP master has failed.
SASM found no baud rate.
SCheck PROFIBUS DP connection.
SCheck the DP master.
SBus failure
SDP master is out of order.
SCheck all cables in your PROFIBUS DP net-
work.
SCheck to determine whether connection plug
for PROFIBUS DP is securely plugged into the
ASM.
Flas-
hing
On SThe configuration data sent by the DP
master to the ASM does not match the
setup of the ASM.
SCheck the configuration of the ASM (input/
output, PROFIBUS address).
SCorrect GSD file used?
(SIEM804C.GSD or SIEM80B6.GSD)
Flas-
hing
Off SASM has found the baud rate but is not
addressed by the DP master.
SASM was not configured.
SCheck the PROFIBUS address on the ASM or
in the configuration software.
SCheck the configuration of the ASM (station
type).
On Flas-
hing
SThe ASM has a hardware defect SReplace the ASM.
* Status is irrelevant.
The following figure shows an example of bared lengths. The lengths are
valid for all cables which you can connect to the connection plug. Any shield
braiding must be twisted, inserted in a core end sleeve, and the excess cut off.
Twisted and trimmed
shield braiding
45
6
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 6-29 Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable
Example for bared
lengths
Interfaces
6-37
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The plug plate must be removed from the ASM before you can set the
PROFIBUS address or circuit the terminating resistance. The plug plate co-
vers the DIP switches. The following figure shows the location of the DIP
switches on the ASM and a sample setting of each.
Example: PROFIBUS address 120 (status on delivery)
7654321
ON
23 +24 + 25 + 26 = 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 = 120
8
Example: Terminating resistance is off (status on delivery)
off
on
ASM 452ASM 450
N. c.
N. c.
Normal operation
ASM 451 – compatible
(use GSD siem804d)
Figure 6-30 Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance
Note
SThe PROFIBUS address on the ASM 450/452 must always correspond to
the PROFIBUS address specified for this ASM with the configuration
software.
SFor correct functioning of the terminating resistance, always switch both
DIP switches of the terminating resistance to “On” or “Off”.
PROFIBUS
address and
terminating
resistance
Interfaces
6-38 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.5 ASM 454/424
The ASM 454/424 interfaces have been developed for decentralized setup
with assembly lines. The attractive but robust housing fits anywhere. Up to
four read/write devices from the MOBY I family can be connected and oper-
ated simultaneously. This ensures dynamic operation of the connected SLG.
The user can choose between the following two interfaces.
SPROFIBUS DPV1 (ASM 454)
SRS 232, serial interface to the PC (ASM 424)
Figure 6-31 ASM 454/424 interface
The ASM 454 uses physical addresses to directly access the data on the
MDS. The non-cyclic protocol service of PROFIBUS DPV1 is used for com-
munication with the user. Function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7 users
for easy integration.
The description of the PROFIBUS DPV1 implementation is available for
programmers of other controllers. See appendix of the FC 45 description.
The ASM 424 uses physical addresses to directly access the data on the
MDS. A serial RS 232 interface with the 3964R protocol is used for commu-
nication with the user. This makes it easy to connect external controllers to
the MOBY I identification system. A C library (MOBY API) is available for
the PC user for his/her applications.
Application area
ASM 454
ASM 424
Interfaces
6-39
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-14 Ordering data for ASM 454/424
ASM 454 interface
for use of MOBY I components via
PROFIBUS DPV1, without filehandler
ASM 424 interface
with serial interface RS 232/RS 422; 3964R pro-
cedure for PC, SICOMP and external controllers
6GT2 002-2EE00
6GT2 002-2CE00
Accessories:
RS 232 stub line between PC <–> ASM 424; can
be fabricated up to a max. of 32 m based on the
length key (see chapter 3.10.4).
SLG stub line (see chapter 3.10)
Plug connector for power supply (socket) for
ASM 454/424
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting
Wide-range power pack
100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC, 2.2 A
(without 24 V cable)
24 V DC stub line for wide-range power pack
6GT2 494-0AA00 (see chapter 7.2)
Length: 5 m
PROFIBUS plug connector
9-pin sub D conn. for 2 stub lines
Software MOBY1
with C library for ASM 424 (MOBY API),
and FC 45, GSD file for ASM 454
6GT2 391-0B...
6GT2 091-0A...
6GT2 390-1AB00
6GT2 390-0BA00
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 491-1HH50
6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0
(see catalog ST 70 or IK PI for
more connectors)
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description, FC 45 (for ASM 454)
German
English
French
Description, MOBY API (C-lib for ASM 424)
German
English
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chapter 7.1.
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-40 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-15 Technical data of ASM 454/424
ASM 454 ASM 424
Serial interface to the user PROFIBUS DPV1 RS 232/RS 422
Line length (max.) See PROFIBUS configuration 30/500 m
Procedure/protocol EN 50 170 vol. 2 PROFIBUS 3964R
Connection 9-pin sub D socket (screw lock)
Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud
(automatic recognigion)
9.6; 19.2;
38.4 Kbaud
(automatic reco-
gnition with
3964R)
Max. block length 4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes
(non-cyclic)
238 bytes
Serial interface to the SLG 4 x 9-pin submin. D socket (screw lock)
Line length Max. of 1000 m; depends on SLG (see chap. 3.10)
Connectable SLG 4 x SLG 4x (parallel operation)
Software functions
Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DPV1
master
MOBY API:
C lib for PC with
Windows 98/NT
SIMATIC S7 function
block
MDS addressing
Commands
Dialog
FC 45
Direct access via addresses
Initialize MDS, read data from MDS,
write data to MDS
No (on request)
–
Direct access via
addresses
Initialize MDS,
read data from
MDS, write data
to MDS
No (on request)
Supply voltage
Connection plug
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
(max.)
Max. switch-on current
UL/CSA
4-pin M12 round plug (pin)
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
250 mA (without SLG)
1.1 A (without SLG)
Yes, when used with an NEC class 2 power supply
Ambient tem
p
erature
Ambient temperature
During operation –25 to +55 °C (no condensation)
gp
Transportation and storage
()
–40 to +85 °C (no condensation)
Technical data
Interfaces
6-41
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-15 Technical data of ASM 454/424
ASM 424ASM 454
Housing
Dimensions (W x H x D)
in mm
Material
Color
205 x 130 x 60 (without plug)
Aluminum
Anthracite
Mounting
Tightening torque
4 M5 screws
Optional: Top hat rail mounting
v 3 Nm
Approx. weight
Protection rating
MTBF (at 40 ° C)
1300 g
IP40 (higher ratings on request)
1 ⋅ 105 hours
24 V=
230 V
6GT2 091-0A...
6GT2 494-0AA00 or
other 24 V connection
6GT2 491-1HH50
SLG SLG SLG SLG
MDS MDS MDSMDS
PROFIBUS:
Plug = 6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0
RS 232:
PC cable = 6GT2 391-0B...
RS 422:
Make cable as shown
in figure 6-34.
Figure 6-32 Configurator for ASM 454/424
Interfaces
6-42 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
RxDPRE ERR
RxD:
PRE:
ERR:
SLG with active command
“Presence” indicates presence of an MDS in the transmission window.
Error indicated by flashing LED
Plugs 1 to 4 to the SLG
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not used
+ Sending
+ Receiving
Nor used
– Receiving
– Sending
Ground (0 V)
+ 24 V
Not used
Hous. Cable shield
Figure 6-33 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG
PROFIBUS
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not used
Not used
B line (red)
Request to Send (RTS)
Ground 5 V (M5)
Potential 5 V
Not used
A line (green)
Not used
Hous. Cable shield
PROFIBUS
(floating, 60 mA)
SERIAL DC 24 V
ON
1234 67 9 11121085
ON: 24 V present on ASM
(green)
SF/BF: System fault/bus
(red) fault, RAM error
ASM 424: flashes
after power-on.
Flashing stops
after first real
telegram.
ACT: This LED briefly
(green) flashes once when
a command has been
processed.
Pin Designation
SF/BF
ON ACT
1
2
3
4
Ground
+ 24V
Ground
+ 24V
SERIAL
Socket RS 232
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TxD (sending)
RxD (receiving)
Not used
Not used
Ground (0V)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
DC 24 V
Switch 1 to 7: PROFIBUS address
Switch 1 ON: 20
Switch 2 ON: 21
:
Switch 7 ON: 26
Example: PROFIBUS address= 84
(22 + 24 + 26)
Switch 8: Interface
ON: RS 422
OFF: RS 232
Switches 9 to 11: Not used
1
2
34
RS 422
–TxD
–RxD
Not used
Not used
Ground
Not used
Not used
+TxD
+RxD
Hous. Cable shield Cable shield
1 Only for ASM 454
2 Only for ASM 424
1
2
1
2
Switch 1 to 7 = 0FF: Default: 3964R
Switch 1 to 7 ≠ 0FF: See other
operating modes
of the ASM 424
Switch 1 to 7: Operating mode,
serial interface 2
Switch 12: Presence check in
1-channel mode 2
ON: Presence check by firmware
OFF: Presence check off
Figure 6-34 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user
Pin assignment
and switches
Interfaces
6-43
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Starting with release status C, the ASM 424 offers more operating modes.
The expanded operating modes are set with switches 1 to 8 and 12.
1
ON = 1
OFF= 0
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12
. . .
Default; 3964R
Serial interface = RS 232
Serial interface = RS 422
(Baud rates 9600, 19200 and 38400
are recognized automatically.)
Switches
0000000s 0
0
1
LAUF driver*
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
19200 Baud
38400 Baud
00yyy01s 0
000
001
010
011
100
1-channel mode**; 3964R
Slave with 3964R
Master with 3964R
Presence check off
Presence check on
01yyym0s p
0
1
0
1
1-channel mode**; LAUF driver*
01yyy01s p
* With the LAUF driver, each user byte is transferred with two ASCII bytes.
Example:
The data string with the user data 01 02 00 00 hex must appear on the line as
shown below:
02 30 31 30 32 30 30 30 30 0A 03 (hex)
** 1-channel mode
1-channel mode is compatible with the ASM 420. In this mode the ASM 424
replaces an ASM 420. Only one SLG can be run on channel 1. The channel byte
is omitted in the protocol.
STX Channel
(ASCII)
User data
(ASCII)
CR
(opt.)
ETX
Further operating
modes of the
ASM 424
Interfaces
6-44 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
129
205
Grounding
bolts (N4)
Figure 6-35 Dimensional drawing of ASM 454/424
3
4
5
1
2
Item Designation Quantity
1 Floor plate 1
2 Profile 1
3 Oval headscrew,
M5 x 10
4
4 Washer, A5.3 4
5 Countersunk
screw, M4 x 10
2
Figure 6-36 Mounting diagram for the adapter floor plate
Note
To adjust to the particular situation, the profile section (item 2) can be turned
by 90° and then installed on the floor plate.
Dimensional
drawing with
mounting holes
Adapter floor plate
for top-hat-rail
mounting
Interfaces
6-45
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.6 ASM 470/475
The ASM 470/475 interface can be installed in the SIMATIC S7-300 and
ET 200M. It can be used for all MOBY systems.
Up to eight ASM 470/475 interfaces can be installed and operated in one
module rack of the SIMATIC S7-300. When a layout with several module
racks (maximum of four) is used, the ASM 470/475 can be installed and
operated in each of these module racks. In a maximum SIMATIC S7-300
configuration, up to 32 ASM can be used centrally. The ASMs can also be
used in the distributed I/O ET 200M on PROFIBUS. This makes use in an
S7-400 environment possible. Up to 7 ASMs can be operated per ET 200M.
Error messages and operational states are indicated with LEDs. Galvanic
isolation between SLG and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus ensure layouts which
are not as susceptible to interference.
Figure 6-37 ASM 470/475 interface
In multiplex operation, up to two SLGs can be connected to the ASM 470.
The FC 47 function block ensures simple programming via SIMATIC S7
tools. The FC 47 can be used with both the S7-300 and the S7-400. The
ET 200M can also be used to operate the ASM 470 in a SIMATIC S5 envi-
ronment. FB 47 is available for PLCs 115U to 155U.
On the hardware side, communication between ASM 470 and the S7-300
CPU is handled by a 16-byte address area so that up to 12 bytes of user data
can be transferred with each read/write command.
Application area
ASM 470
Interfaces
6-46 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The ASM 475 (order number 6GT2 002-0GA10) is a parameterizable mod-
ule. This means the basic functions have already been specified when the
module was configured in HW-Config (e.g., normal addressing or filehand-
ler).
The ASM 475 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses.
The FC 45 function controls use in a SIMATIC S7.
Together the ASM 475 and FC 45 form a unit which can be used to read the
MDS data easily and at optimum speed. A 32-Kbyte MDS memory can be
read in 24 seconds, almost without regard to the S7 cycle time.
The MOBY I filehandler is implemented on the ASM 475. The filehandler is
a file management system similar to DOS for the MOBY I identification sys-
tem. It consists of a program which is executed on the interface module. The
MDS and SLG MOBY I components are identical, with and without filehan-
dler. The FC 56 function controls operation in a SIMATIC S7.
ASM 470
ASM 475
SLG SLG
MDS MDS
Shield connection terminal
(6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0)
Shield connecting element
(6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0)
for 2 modules
6GT2 091-0E...
(see chap. 3.10
or figure 6-40)
Figure 6-38 Configurator for ASM 470/475
ASM 475
ASM 475
(normal
addressing)
ASM 475
(filehandler)
Interfaces
6-47
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-16 Ordering data for ASM 470/475
Interface ASM 470
for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG multiplex;
no front plug
Interface ASM 475
for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG parallel;
normal addressing; no front plug
6GT2 002-0FA10
6GT2 002-0GA10
Accessories
Front connector (1 per ASM)
Shield connection terminal (1 per SLG cable)
Shield connecting element (1 per 2 ASMs)
Connection cable, ASM ↔ SLG
MOBY software1
with FC 47, FB 47 for ASM 470,
FC 45 for ASM 475 with normal addressing
FC 56 for ASM 475 with filehandler
6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0
6GT2 091-0E...
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description-ASM 470/FC 47 for S7
German
English
Description-ASM 470/FB 47 for S5
German
Englisch
Description-FC 45 (ASM 475)
German
Englisch
French
Description-FC 56 (ASM 475, filehandler)
German
Englisch
Electronically on the
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically on the
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically on the
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically on the
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chapter 7.1.
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-48 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-17 Technical data of ASM 470/475
ASM Type ASM 470 ASM 475
(Normal Addressing)
ASM 475
(Filehandler)
Interface to S7-300 or ET 200M P-bus; I/O input and I/O
output
P-bus; cyclic and non-cyclic services
Communication 16 bytes I/O 2 words (cyclic); 238 bytes (non-cyclic)
Command buffer on ASM 1 x 12 bytes per ASM 70 x 238 bytes per SLG 1 x 238 bytes per SLG
Serial interface to the SLG
Plug connector Via screw terminals on front plug
Front plug connector is not included.
Line length, max. Standard cable = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
MOBY systems supported I/E/F/V I/E/F/U I/U
Connectable SLGs Multiplex
2 x SLG
Parallel
2 x SLG
Parallel
2 x SLG
Software functions
Programming SIMATIC user: With FC/FB
Other users: Telegram description as per appendix of FC description
Function block
SIMATIC S7 FC 47 FC 45 FC 56
SIMATIC S5 FB 47 – –
MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Access via logical file
names
Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS,
write data to MDS
Format MDS, read file,
write file, etc.
MOBY I dialog:
Normal station/VMDS Yes/yes Yes/no No/no
PROFIBUS diagnosis Yes. Can be parameterized via RESET.
S7 diagnosis No Yes. Can be called via S7 OM.
Firmware reloadable No Yes. Via SIMATIC Manager.
Power supply
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC 20.4 V to 28.8 V DC
Current consumption
SWithout SLG at
U = 24 V DC, max.
50 mA 350 mA
SWith SLG connected Max. of 600 mA with
one SLG
Max. of 300 mA per SLG
when two SLGs are con-
nected
Max. of 500 mA per connected SLG
Technical data
Interfaces
6-49
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-17 Technical data of ASM 470/475
ASM Type ASM 475
(Filehandler)
ASM 475
(Normal Addressing)
ASM 470
Power loss of the
module, typical
1 W 2 W
Current consumption from
P-bus, max.
100 mA 80 mA
Galvanic isolation between
S7-300 and MOBY
Depends (100 kΩ
between S7-300 and
24 V DC)
Yes. Use for ungrounded operation of a separate
power pack for the ASM.
Fuse, 24 V to SLG Yes. Electronic. Yes. Electronic.
Ambient temperature
During operation
SSIMATIC horizontal 0°C to +60°C
SSIMATIC vertical 0°C to +40°C
During transportation and
storage
–40°C to +70°C
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 40 x 125 x 120
Weight, approx. 0.2 kg
The ASM 470/475 is commissioned with the following steps.
SMount module
SMount module on the S7-300 mounting rail. See S7-300 manual.
Note
The CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to STOP status before the module
is mounted.
!Warning
The S7-300 may only be wired when the voltage is off.
Note
To ensure interference-free operation of the ASM 475, make sure that ASM
and SIMATIC CPU (or ASM and IM 153 with ET 200M) are run on the
same voltage.
Non-adherence may cause possible error messages on the CPU not to be
cleared when the ASM is turned on.
Wiring
Interfaces
6-50 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The following figure shows the front plate of the ASM 470/475 and the in-
side of the front door with the related connection diagram. The SLGs must
be connected to the ASM as shown in the connection diagram.
SLG 1
T+
T–
R+
R–
SLG 2
T+
T–
R+
R–
ASM475 SF
DC5 V
ACT_1
ERR_1
PRE_1
RxD_1
ACT_2
ERR_2
PRE_2
RxD_2
6GT2 002-0GA106GT2 002-0FA10
MOBY
ASM470
MOBY
SF
24 V
Active
Error
SLG 1
RxD
ANW
Error
SLG 2
RxD
Status and error indicators Connection diagram
The numbers for the con-
nection are based on plug
connector X1 located on the
upper part of the housing.
Figure 6-39 Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475
Table 6-18 Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475
ASM 470 ASM 475 Meaning
SF SF System fault (hardware error on ASM)
24 V DC 5 V 24 V are connected to ASM.
5 V voltage on ASM is okay.
Active ACT_1, ACT_2 The appropriate SLG is processing a user com-
mand.
Front panel
Indicator elements
on ASM
Interfaces
6-51
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-18 Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475
ASM 470 MeaningASM 475
Error ERR_1, ERR_2 The flashing pattern shows the last error. This indi-
cator can be reset with the option_1 parameter.
ANW PRE_1, PRE_2 Indicates the presence of an MDS
RxD RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates communication to the SLG . Interference
on SLG can also cause this LED to light up.
SLG 1, SLG 2 –Indicates the SLG which was selected by the user
command. Only one LED may light up at a time
(multiplex operation).
Additional operational states are indicated on the ASM 475 on the LEDs
PRE, ERR, and SF.
Table 6-19 Additional LEDs on the ASM 475
SF PRE_1 ERR_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 Description, Causes, Remedy
ON OFF/ON ON (perm.) OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...)
ON OFF ON OFF OFF Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant).
OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz OFF Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected.
→Load firmware.
→Do not turn off ASM.
OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with error
→New start required.
→Load firmware again.
→Check update files.
Any 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error
→Turn ASM on/off.
OFF OFF 1 x flash
every 2 sec
OFF 1 x flash
every 2 sec
ASM has booted and is waiting for a RESET
(init_run) from the user.
Interfaces
6-52 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The figure below shows a connection cable between ASM and SLG. The
colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for the ASM 470. See
chapter 3.10.3.
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Pink
Grey
6
1
4
5
2
3
4 (12)
5 (13)
6 (14)
7 (15)
8 (16)
9 (17)
Front plug connector
of ASM
(6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0)
Cable with core sleeves
(Shield)
Cable shield bared
SLG plug connector
(socket)
Figure 6-40 Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...)
See chapter 3.9 or figure 6-38.
Implement the lightning protection and grounding measures required for your
application. Lightning protection measures always require individual consid-
eration of the entire system.
To ensure EMC, the SLG cable must be led over an S7-300 shield connecting
element. When customers make their own cables, the shield of the SLG cable
must be bared as shown in figure 6-41.
17030 Specifications
in mm
Figure 6-41 Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable
Wiring to the SLG
Shield connection
Lightning protec-
tion
Customer cable
fabricating
Interfaces
6-53
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Note
Installation of MOBY requires functional STEP 7 software on the PC/PG.
Installation and configuration of the ASM 470/475 in the SIMATIC is han-
dled by an installation program. The installation program is included with
the “MOBY software” product (6GT2 080-2AA10).
The “Software MOBY” CD contains the installation files in subdirectory
S7_om. Installation is almost completely automatic when Setup.exe is cal-
led. The specified steps during SETUP must be responded to.
Note
Remember that you will have to execute a separate Setup for installation of
ASM 470 and ASM 475.
The ASM 470/475 module is located in the hardware catalog of HWCONFIG
under the following subdirectory for hardware configuration of the SIMATIC
S7.
SIMATIC 300
SM 300
Special 300
MOBY ASM470
MOBY ASM475*
6GT2 002-0GA00
MOBY ASM475 PARAM
6GT2 002-0GA10
* Discontinued
Figure 6-42 ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog
Configuration
of ASM for
SIMATIC S7
under STEP 7
Installation
Interfaces
6-54 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
You can use the file-dearchivation function of the SIMATIC Manager to load
the FC with a sample project from the applicable subdirectory of the
“Software MOBY” CD. Afterwards, the sample project is located in the
directory S7PROJ of the SIMATIC Manager.
ASM Type Directory in
“Software MOBY”
Project Name in
SIMATIC Manager
Path Name in
SIMATIC Manager
ASM 470
ASM 475
FC47
FC45
ASM470_CPU416
MOBY FC45
ASM470_C
Moby_f_1
FC 45/47 with
sample project
Interfaces
6-55
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.7 ASM 473
The ASM 473 interface is a MOBY module for the SIMATIC S7. It can
be installed in the ET 200X and DESINA distributed I/O device. The inter-
face of the ET 200X to the user is PROFIBUS DPV1. An S7-300 or S7-400
with integrated PROFIBUS connection can be used as the controller.
The ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface modules
ASM 470 and ASM 475. Its protection rating of IP67 permits it to be
set up and operated directly in the process without additional protection.
Other features:
SUp to 7 ASM 473s can be operated in one ET 200X station.
SAll I/O modules from the ET 200X family can be run parallel to the
ASM 473.
The MDS data are accessed by physically addressing the MDS.
The FC 45 function is available for use in a SIMATIC S7. The hardware con-
figuration of the ASM 473 is performed with an Object Manager which is
integrated in the SIMATIC Manager.
The MOBY I filehandler is implemented on the ASM 473. The filehandler is
a file management system similar to DOS for the MOBY I identification sys-
tem. It consists of a program which is executed on the interface module. The
MDS and SLG MOBY I components are identical, with and without filehan-
dler. The FC 56 function controls operation in a SIMATIC S7.
Figure 6-43 ASM 473 interface
Application area
ASM 473
(normal
addressing)
ASM 473
(filehandler)
Interfaces
6-56 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-20 Ordering data of ASM 473
ASM 473 interface module 6GT2 002-0HA10
Accessories:
SLG cable (2 m = standard cable)
For other lengths, see chapter 3.10.4
Opt. ASM connection plug without SLG cable
(for cable lengths up to 1000 m)
Software MOBY with 1
FC 45 for normal addressing
FC 56 for filehandler
6GT2 091-1CH20
6GT2 090-0BC00
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description of FC 45
German
English
French
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Description of FC 56
German
English
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chapter 7.1.
Table 6-21 Technical data of ASM 473
Normal Addressing Filehandler
Interface to ET 200X
Communication
SIMATIC S7 P-bus
Cyclic and non-cyclic services
2 words (cyclic)/
238 bytes (non-cyclic)
Command buffer in ASM 70 x 238 bytes 1 x 238 bytes
Serial interface to SLG
Plug connector
Line length, max.
Connectable SLGs
2 x coupling plug, M12
20 m
2 m = standard length
Other fabricatable cables = 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
1 x SLG 4x
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-57
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-21 Technical data of ASM 473
FilehandlerNormal Addressing
Software functions
Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master
SIMATIC S7
function block
MDS addressing
Commands
MOBY I dialog:
Normal station/VMDS
FC 45
Direct access via
addresses
Initialize MDS,
read data from MDS,
write data to MDS
Yes/no
FC 56
Access via logical file
names
Format MDS,
read file, write file,
etc.
No/no
PROFIBUS diagnosis
S7 diagnosis
Reloadable firmware
Yes; ET 200X basic station.
Yes. Can be called via S7 OM.
Yes. Via SIMATIC Manager.
Power supply
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
SFrom encoder
voltage
SFrom load voltage
(SLG power)
Power loss of module
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
24 V DC
20.4 V to 28.8 V DC
75 mA, typical
Max. of 500 mA (or see technical data of connected
SLG)
1.6 W, typical
Via expansion modules from ET 200X family
Via expansion modules from ET 200X family
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation
and storage
0°C to +55°C
–40°C to +70°C
Dimensions
(W x H x D) in mm
Dimensions of single
devices
Dimensions of scale
Mounting
87 x 110 x 55
60 x 110 x 55
2 M5 screws (customer)
2 M3 screws (device)
Protection rating IP67
Weight 0.275 kg
MTBF (at 40°C) 106 hours
For setup guidelines and other general technical data, see the ET 200X
manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0).
Interfaces
6-58 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
PROFIBUS DP master module
(e.g., S7-400 CPU)
(Connection of other master is
under preparation.)
2 m (standard cable length)
SLG
MDS
PROFIBUS
cable to all
PROFIBUS slaves
24 V for ET 200X
electronics and
MOBY-SLG
Basic module
BM 141
BM 142
BM 143
BM 147
Figure 6-44 Configurator for an ASM 473
Note
In contrast to ASM 45x (see figure 6-22), the 24 V power must be provided
on the PROFIBUS plug and the load voltage plug. For details, see ET 200X
manual.
Configuration
Interfaces
6-59
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The following table shows the status of the ET 200X basic modules as of
10/2002. The functions of new basic modules are stored in HW-Config of
SIMATIC Manager.
Table 6-22 Prerequisites for use of ASM 473
Order Number of
ET 200X Basic Module
Can Be Run with
ASM 473
(6GT2 002–0HA00)*
Can Be Run with
ASM 473 PARAM
(6GT2 002-0HA10)
6ES7 141-1BF00-0XB0 No No
6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0 No No
6ES7 141-1BF10-0XB0 No No
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 Yes Ye s
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 142-1BD10-0XB0 No No
6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0 No No
6ES7 142-1BD20-0XB0 No No
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0 No Yes**
6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0 No No
6ES7 147-1AA01-0XB0 No Yes
* Discontinued
** Prerequisites for use: Please parameterize the module 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 in
HW-Config.
Basic module –
prequisites for use
of ASM 473
Interfaces
6-60 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Up to 7 ASM 473s can be operated
in one ET 200X.
Figure 6-45 Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X
Depending on the PROFIBUS master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be
run on one PROFIBUS branch.
The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of SIMATIC
Manager by calling Setup.exe in the directory Daten\S7_OM on the “Soft-
ware MOBY” CD. Currently, the ASM 473 cannot be integrated in other
masters.
An SLG always occupies the two M12 connection sockets (X3 and X 4) on
the ASM 473. A prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.10) ensures
easy connection of the SLG. The standard version of this cable is 2 m in
length. Other lengths are available on request.
An SLG connection plug with screw terminals (see figure 6-23) is available
for users who want to make their own cable. Cable and SLG connection plug
can be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
Hardware
configuration
SLG connection
Interfaces
6-61
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The following figure shows the pin assignment to the SLG and the indicator
elements.
ERR
ON (perm.)
OFF
OFF
2 Hz
5 Hz
1 x flash
every 2 sec
PRE
OFF/ON
ON
2 Hz
2 Hz
5 Hz
OFF
Socket Pin assignment (SLG)
1
2
3
4
5
+RxD
+TxD
–TxD
–RxD
PE
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
General operational indicators (SF, BF, ON, DC24 V) are located on the
basic module of the ET 200X.
LEDs for MOBY
RxD: SLG is busy with a command.
PRE: Indicates the presence of an MDS
ERR: Flashing pattern (see appendix B.1) indicates error.
X3
1
2
3
4
5
+24 V
n. c.
0 V
n. c.
PE
X4
Additional operational states of the ASM are indicated on the LEDs PRE and
ERR.
Description, Causes, Remedy
Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...).
Loader is defective (can only be repaired at the
plant).
Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected.
→Load firmware.
→Do not turn off ASM.
Firmware loading terminated with error
→New start required.
→Load firmware again.
→Check update files.
Operating system error
→Turn ASM or ET 200X basis station off/on.
ASM booted and is waiting for a RESET (init_run)
from the user.
Figure 6-46 Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473
Pin assignment
Interfaces
6-62 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The figure below shows the dimensions for the positions of the holes for the
screws. This information applies to a basic module and an expansion module
(ASM 473).
n 60
120
53.5
n = number of expansion modules
28.25
126.8
BM 141/142 ASM 473
87
110
For M5
mounting
screw
Figure 6-47 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules.
Dimensions for the
mounting holes
Interfaces
6-63
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6.8 SIM Serial Interface Module
SIM (i.e., Serial Interface Module) is a general-purpose module for operation
of MOBY I via a serial interface on any of the components below.
SComputers
SPCs
SPLC of other manufacturers
Its sturdy housing permits it to be used in rugged environments and makes it
resistant to many chemical substances.
SIM combines an ASM interface and an SLG read/write device in one hous-
ing.
It is available with one of three interfaces (i.e., RS 422, TTY or V.24).
All SIM models can be operated with various procedures (i.e., 3964R, Lauf,
SINEC L1 and the SINUMERIK protocol).
AT-comp. PC
SIM
MDS
Cable length ≤ 3 m
SIEMENS
SITOP
power 2.5
6GT2 332-1SH12
Figure 6-48 Configurator for SIM
The connecting cable between the power supply unit and the SIM may not
exceed a length of 3 m. Power supply units which are to be operated in
connection with a SIM must have a feedback attenuation of at least 20 dB
at 134 kHz. One suitable power supply unit is, for example, the
SITOP power 2.5 from Siemens (order number 6EP1 332-1SH12).
Application area
Layout and
function
Interfaces
6-64 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Diagonal mounting
holes for M5 screws 25-pin sub D plug connector for:
– Serial interface
– Baud rate setting
– Specification of the transmission procedure
– Control of the data carrier
− Voltage supply of the module (24 V DC)
The transmission window
for all MDS types is located
above or below the Sie-
mens label.
Plastic housing of
polyamide 12
Screw-type lock (for all in-
terface models) (inch
threading 2.54 mm)
Figure 6-49 SIM serial interface module
Table 6-23 Ordering data for SIM
Serial interface module SIM
consisting of ASM interface
and read/write device
SIM 41 with V.24 (RS 232) interface
SIM 42 with RS 422 (RS 485, V.11) interface
SIM 43 with TTY (20 mA linear current)
interface
MOBY software1
with 3964R drivers and tools for DOS
and Windows 95/NT
25-pin submin. D plug connector
(not included)
Stub lines and accessories
6GT2 005-0AA10
6GT2 005-0BA10
6GT2 005-0CA10
6GT2 080-2AA10
6AW5 418-4F
See chapter 3.10
Description-SIM
German
English
Description-T3964R (DOS), stapled
German
English
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chapter 7.1.
SIM hardware
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-65
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 6-24 Technical data of SIM serial interface module
Serial interface
Transmission s
p
eed
25-pin subminiature plug connector
2400 to 9600 baud
Transmission speed
Procedure
2400 to 9600 baud
3964R, SINEC L1, Lauf and
SINUMERIK protocol
Line length (typ. max)
SINUMERIK
pro
t
oco
l
1000 m (shielded) TTY
1000 ( hi ld d) RS 422
1000 m (shielded) RS 422
30 m (shielded) V.24
Software functions
Commands Read MDS, write, initialize, scan DI/DO,
Next
Programming Depends on computer, PC or PLC of
other manufacturer. 3964R driver with
interface to MS-C available for PC.
3964R driver also available for Windows
95 and Windows NT.
Digital inputs Via 25-pin sub D plug connector
Number 2
Galvanic isolation No
Input voltage
For logical “0” –2 to +5 V
For logical “1” +12 to +33 V (Ri = 10 kΩ)
Delay time < 10 msec
Digital outputs Via 25-pin sub D plug connector
Number 2
Galvanic isolation No
(internal voltage supply) short-circuit
proof
Imax = 200 mA (per DO; or for 2 DO)
Inductive interface to MDS
(integrated SLG)
Read/write distance between SLG - MDS Max. of 40 mm, see field data
Transmission frequency
SPower 134 kHz
SData 1.81 MHz
Supply voltage Via 25-pin sub D plug connector
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption (max.) 220 mA (DO not loaded)
Permissible shock stress 30 g
Protection rating in acc. w. IEC 529 IP54 (with special plug connector)
Ambient temperature
During operation 0° to +60° C
During transportation and storage –20° to +70° C
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 75 x 75 x 40
Weight (approx.) 0.3 kg
Technical data
Interfaces
6-66 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
All technical data listed here are typical data and apply to a room tempera-
ture of 25° C, a supply voltage of 24 V and a metal-free environment.
Tolerances of + 20% are permitted for special production conditions or tem-
peratures.
Table 6-25 Field data of SIM
MDS 514 MDS 506 MDS 439 E
Length of transmission window in mm (L)
L 2L L 2L L 2L
60 80 85 100 75 100
Width of transmission window in mm (W)
20 30 30
Operating distance in mm (Sa)
0 to 20 0 to 25 0 to 25
Limit distance in mm (Sg)
33 40 33
Distance from MDS to MDS in mm (D1)
>200 >300 >300
D > 700 mm
!Caution
Adherence to the value specified here is essential. If this value is under-
ranged, there is a danger that the inductive fields will be affected. The time
for the data transmission would be increased by an incalculable amount of
time or a command would be terminate with errors.
SIM can be mounted on metal without adversely affecting its range.
a
Metal
Metal-free
Flush installation in metal requires a me-
tal-free space of a = 30 mm.
Figure 6-50 Flush installation of SIM in metal
Field data of SIM
Minimum distance
from SIM to SIM
Metal-free space
Interfaces
6-67
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
View of side
View of top
Transmission window in metal-free surroundings
Transmission window for Sa
2 L
Sa
SgMDS
ÜL
2 L
L
Figure 6-51 Transmission window of SIM
40
6
75
75
47 7.7
21
4
65
75
5
55.5
Housing color: Gray
Housing material: Polyamide 12
Figure 6-52 Dimensions of SIM serial interface module
Transmission
window
Dimensions
(in mm)
Interfaces
6-68 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The 25-pin subminiature D plug connector is used for the following purposes.
SVoltage supply of SIM
SConnection to PC/computer
SParameterization of SIM
Table 6-26 Overview of plug connector assignment for SIM
Pin Meaning
Pins 1 to 8 Connection of SIM to a computer or PC
Interface (depends on type)
SIM 41 → V.24 (RS 232) SIM 42 →RS 422 (V.11) SIM 43 → TTY (only passive)
1 – R * (terminal resistance) + EM (receiving)
2TxD (Transmit Data) E + (receiving) – EM (receiving)
3RxD (Receive Data) D + (sending) + SE (sending)
4 – R – (terminal resistance) – SE (sending)
5 – D – (sending) – 1
6Not used Not used Not used
7GND (signal ground) E – (receiving) –
8Plug housing shield Plug housing shield Plug housing shield
9
10
11
12
DI0
DI1
DO0
DO1
Two digital inputs and outputs each
(e.g., for data carrier control)
13
14
+ 24 V
0 V (ground)
Voltage supply of SIM (20 V to 30 V)
Cable length between the power supply unit and the SIM: max. 3 m
15
16
Not used
Not used
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
S ground: 0 V for plug connector pins 18 to 25
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
For setting:
− Baud rate
– SINEC L1 address
– Transmission procedure
– Type of MDS control
1 SIM 43 with TTY: Pin 5 of the connection plug may not be wired.
Plug connector
assignment
Interfaces
6-69
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Plug pin*) Meaning
24 25
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
No data memory control. Presence check is switched off. The DI/DO can be programmed as
desired with the system command.
Presence check by firmware of SIM
DIs can be used as desired. They can be scanned with the DI/DO command.
Presence check via DI0 and DI1, whereby
DI0 = 1 → MDS entering
DI1 = 1 → MDS leaving
Presence check via DI1, whereby
DI1 = 1 → MDS leaving
DI0 is free and can be scanned with the status command.
Plug pin*) Meaning
18 19 20 21 22 23
a a a a 0 0 SINEC L1
aaaa = Address of SIM on the SiNEC L1 bus
(SIM is always the slave.)
Address allocation: 21 20 19 18 SINEC-Address
1111 1
1110 2
0000 16
Pin *)
:::: :
b b 0 0 1 0 Lauf procedur
1 0 0 1 1 0 STG connection
b
b
b
b
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
3694R: SIM = Slave
3694R: SIM = Master
b b a a 0 1 SINUMERIK 850/880-protocol (without reaction telegram)
2120 SIM-Address (=a a)
110
011
003
Pin *)
102
(always present)
Caution:
When SINUMERIK is used, a kind of presence check must be switched on with
switches 7 and 8.
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Baud rate (= bb) (Applies to Lauf, 3964R and SINUMERIK procedures)
9600 Baud
4800 Baud
2400 Baud
(Reserved)
*) no jumper →log. “1”
Jumper to pin 17 →log. “0”
Parameterization
of pins 17 to 25
Interfaces
6-70 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Interfaces
7-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Accessories 7
7-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7.1 MOBY Software
Starting with version 3.0, the “MOBY Software” product will be delivered on
CD. All function blocks and drivers for the MOBY identification system are
included. The “Les_mich” (i.e., read_me) file in the main directory of the
CD gives a brief explanation of the programs listed below.
SFB 230: Function block for ASM 401; filehandler for SIMATIC S5
SFB 240: Function block for ASM 450; MOBY on PROFIBUS DP with
SIMATIC S5 (including master device file for PROFIBUS DP)
SFB 250: Function block for ASM 400
SFB 41 contains a function block for the ASM 410. The call interface of
this function block is almost identical to that of FB 250.
See the description of FB 250 for programming.
SFC 44 permits the ASM 450 to be used in a SIMATIC S7 environment.
Be sure to read the “Read_me” file in the FC 44 directory carefully.
SFC 45: S7 function for ASM 452/454/473/475
SFC 46 for ASM 452 (filehandler mode). The block can be used on the
S7-300 and S7-400.
SFB 246 for ASM 452 (filehandler mode). The block can be used on the
S5-115U with IM 308-C.
SFunction FC 47 for ASM 470
SFB 47 contains a function block for the SIMATIC S5-115U to 155U. It
permits the ASM 470 to be used in a SIMATIC S5 environment with an
ET 200M.
SFC 56 for ASM 452, ASM 473, ASM 475 in filehandler mode. FC 56 has
the same functions as FC 46, but offers a new, trend-setting interface to
the application.
SLoading program for ES 030 and a master device file for connection of
the ES 030 to PROFIBUS DP.
STest and demonstrator programs for presenting the functions (e.g., “read
from MDS”, “write to MDS” and so on) on a PC (e.g., with DOS or
Windows). MOBY modules ASM 424 or SIM 41 are connected by a
serial interface cable to the PC (i.e., COM1 or COM2).
SBrief explanations of the individual directories in German or English.
Cf. “les_mich.txt” or “read_me.txt”.
S3964R driver for DOS, Windows 95 and Windows NT
SCurrent status of the MOBY documentation in PDF format
STools: Includes useful programs for MOBY configuration
SS7_OM: Installation program and Object Manager for interface modules
ASM 470, ASM 475 and ASM 473
Sample projects with the appropriate FCs are not installed here.
They are located in the respective FC directories.
A
ccessories
7-3
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The “Software MOBY” CD offers user-friendly prompting based on HTML.
When Start.exe is called, a screen appears with the following main items in
the upper menu bar:
SFC für S7
SFB für S5
SPC Support
SDoku
STools
SDemo
SNews
Note
On Software MOBY or licensing
When an interface module or SIM is purchased, no software or documenta-
tion is supplied. The “Software MOBY” CD-ROM must be ordered sepa-
rately. It contains all available FBs/FCs for the SIMATIC, C-libraries for
Windows 98/NT, demo programs and so on. In addition, the CD-ROM con-
tains the complete MOBY documentation (in German, English and French)
in PDF format.
When an interface module or SIM is purchased, the percentile price of uti-
lization of the software incl. documentation on the “Software MOBY”
CD-ROM is included. The purchaser obtains the right to make copies (copy
license) as needed by the customer-specific application or development for
the system.
In addition, the enclosed contract applies to the use of software products
against one-time payment.
Table 7-1 Ordering data for MOBY software
Order No.
MOBY software 6GT2 080-2AA10
User prompting
Ordering data
A
ccessories
7-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply
The MOBY wide-range power pack is a compact, primary-pulsed power
supply. It is designed for use on single-phase, alternating current networks
with two DC outputs (socket connector, parallel circuited).
Its robust construction features an aluminum housing which gives the fine-
tuned system physical strength while protecting it from electromagnetic in-
terference and providing it with optimal heat dissipation.
A built-in current limitation circuit protects the primary-pulsed power supply
against overload and ensures continuous short circuit resistance.
The integrated overvoltage protection (SIOV) which is standard protects the
connected electronics from excessively high voltage.
Figure 7-1 MOBY wide-range power pack
Table 7-2 Ordering data of the MOBY wide-range power pack
Order No.
MOBY wide-range power pack,
100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC/2.2 A;
incl. counterplug for the output voltage
24 V stub line for ASM 424, ASM 454;
length: 5 m
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 491-1HH50
Table 7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Input
Input voltage
Nominal value
Range
Frequency
Input current
Efficiency
Power connection
Power failure backup
Undervoltage switchoff
Overvoltage protection
100 to 230 V AC
90 to 253 V AC
50/60 Hz
0.85 to 0.45 A
w 80% at full load
2 m power line with protective
contact connector
w 10 msec
Yes
SIOV
Description
Ordering data
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-5
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack
Output
Nominal output voltage
Nominal output current
Residual ripple
Startup current limitation
Continuous short circuit protection
Socket contacts
24 V DC
2.2 A
20 mVss Up to 160 kHz
50 mVss Greater than 160 kHz
NTC
Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
Cooling
-20_C to +40_htC
(max. of +60_C; see notes on
safety)
-40_C to +80_C
Convection
General specifications
Dimensions of power supply incl.
mounting plate (L x W x H) in mm
Weight
Color
Mounting
205 x 80 x 60
(without connection plug)
Approx. 1000 g
Anthracite
4 M5 screws
Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference emission (EN 50 081-1)
Interference immunity (EN 50 082-2)
Class B in acc. w. EN 55 022
EN 61 000-4-2
Safety
Certifications
Electrical safety check
Galvanic isolation, primary/secondary
Protection class
Protection rating
CE, GS
EN 60 950/VDE 0805 and
VDE 106 (part 1)
4 kV AC
I, in acc. w. EN 60 950
(VDE 0805)
IP 65, in acc. w. EN 60 529 (only
when connected)
2
3
1
4
Output 1 and 2:
Socket 1: Ground (0 V)
Socket 2: +24 V DC
Socket 3: +24 V DC
Socket 4: Ground (0 V)
Figure 7-2 Connection assignment of 24 V output
Connector
assignment
24 V output
A
ccessories
7-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
80
7.5 65
190
7.5
176
205
573
5 5
Figure 7-3 Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack
!Caution
Do not open the devices or modify them.
Non-adherence will invalidate CE certification and the manufacturer’s war-
ranty. When installing the power pack, adhere to the applicable DIN/VDE
regulations of your country.The application area of the power pack is limited
to “information technology of electrical office equipment” as stated in the
standard EN 60 950/VDE 0805.
Devices may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel.
For the purposes of the safety notes on this product, qualified personnel are
those persons who are authorized to commission, ground and tag devices,
systems and electrical circuits in accordance with safety standards. The de-
vice may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and tech-
nical description and only in connection with devices and components rec-
ommended by Siemens. If devices and components of other manufacturers
are used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens.
Correct operation of the product includes proper storage, setup and mount-
ing, and careful operator control and maintenance.
When installing, make sure that the power outlet socket can be easily
accessed.
During operation, the housing may heat up to +40° C. This is no cause for
concern. However, at an ambient temperature of more than +40° C, be sure
to cover the power pack (power pack must still receive sufficient ventilation)
so that people cannot touch the hot housing.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Notes on safety
A
ccessories
7-7
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7.3 MOBY STG I Hand-Held Terminal
The STG I adds to the MOBY I identification system a powerful mobile
hand-held terminal for applications in the areas of logistics, distribution and
service. The service and test device (STG) is an indispensable aid for com-
missioning and testing. All MOBY I data memories can be read and write-
accessed inductively. The STG I replaces the familiar STG 4F hand-held ter-
minal which is now only available as a replacement part.
Figure 7-4 MOBY STG I hand-held terminal
The STG I mobile hand-held terminal consists of a basic device
(PSION Workaboutmx) and a plug-in compact read/write head. It has a hou-
sing which is protected against splashed water (IP54), an LCD monitor
screen with 240 x 100 pixels, an alphanumeric keyboard and various interfa-
ces (for EEPROM card, charging battery, RS 232/TTL for MOBY I read
head, battery charging interface including RS 232 for the PC coupling, and so
on).
Application areas
Setup and function
A
ccessories
7-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The included MOBY software (memory card) provides service and test func-
tions for reading, writing, etc. of all MOBY I data memories.
SRead data from the data memory
SWrite data to the data memory
SDelete entire data memory (write with filler value)
SPresent and edit the data in hexadecimal or ASCII format
SStore read data in a file
SEnable/disable password protection for all write functions
SChoice of English or German as menu language
Using the optional C library as a basis, it is very easy to program your own
applications including a customized user interface for reading and writing
data memories. Various development tools are available for the PC, and a
large selection of accessories is available directly from PSION. New applica-
tions are opened up in the area of logistics and distribution (e.g., goods com-
missioning data can be recorded offline with the hand-held terminal or pro-
cessed and forwarded to the PC/computer later).
With MOBY I, the “FILEHANDLER” program can be called on the STG I.
This provides you with very convenient functions for handling your data.
SFormat the MDS
SSet up files on the MDS
SWrite files on the MDS and the hand-held terminal
SRead files on the MDS and the hand-held terminal
SRead and display the directory of the MDS or hand-held terminal
SDelete files from the MDS and the hand-held terminal
See http://www.psion.com/industrial/ on the Internet.
S3link adapter cable to the PC for easy exchange of data between PC and
PSION Workaboutmx
SPSION Workaboutmx basic device with large function keys and numeric
keyboard
SAdditional memory card with up to 8 Mbytes of memory
SDocking station including high-speed charging device and software for
convenient data exchange between PSION Workaboutmx and PC
Filehandler
functions
Optional
components
A
ccessories
7-9
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The following prerequisites must be met when the library for SIBO ‘C’
(SIBO ‘C’ is the C developmental environment for the PSION Workabout) is
used.
SPC The C development package for the PSION Workabout
must be installed on the PC. This development package
is available directly from PSION.
See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/.
SHand-held The PSION Workabout with wall bracket and power
terminal pack. Use of the STG I MOBY hand-held terminal is
recommended.
SPC cable You will need a 3link adapter cable from PSION for the
connection to the PC.
See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/. The cable is only
required if not already included with the C development
package.
SC library The following files are required for MOBY
programming.
– Normal addressing
MOBY_I.H
MOBY_STG.LIB
– Filehandler
FH_CMD.H
FH_STG.LIB
FH_STRUC.H
FHDEF.H
FHERR.H
FHEXTERN.H
These are supplied by Siemens with the MOBY SIBO ‘C’
library.
Note
In principle, applications can also be developed in the Basic programming
language OVAL. However, the MOBY library cannot be used.
System
prerequisites for
customer-specific
applications
A
ccessories
7-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
The following figure shows the primary hardware interfaces which you can
use to write your own applications.
ASCII keyboard, shift and special function
keys (Ctrl, )
Control keys: Contrast; display illumination;
on/off; and cursor keys
Additional Flash memory cards for storing
large amounts of data
TTL interface for use of a
MOBY read head
RS 232 interface
(e.g. connection of a
MOBY I ASM, RS 232)
Graphical LCD screen
LIF interface for connection of PC,
printer, charging function, and so on
Numeric input block with Enter key
Green LED (lights up when the battery is
being charged)
Figure 7-5 Hardware of the MOBY STG I hand-held terminal
If you are using another type of PSION Workabout, other interfaces are also
available. A few examples are listed below.
SInfrared interface
SNumeric keyboard and function keys
Hardware
A
ccessories
7-11
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 7-4 Ordering data of the STG I hand-held terminal
Order No.
Mobile STG I hand-held terminal
Basic device (PSION Workaboutmx)
with MOBY I read/write head, battery, standard soft-
ware including STG functionality and filehandler soft-
ware on EEPROM card, user’s guide, without char-
ging station
Charging station for a mobile hand-held terminal with
230 V AC plug connector power pack
6GT2 003-0CA00
6GT2 303-1DA00
Accessories:
MOBY I read/write head, 1.81 MHz + 134 KHz wi-
thout software and without description
Memory card with STG software and filehandler soft-
ware for MOBY D/E/F/I/U, including user’s guide
C library for MOBY D/E/F/I/U for development of
customer-specific screen dialogs, without development
tools, including description
6GT2 003-1CA00
6GT2 303-1CA00
6GT2 381-1AB00
Extra battery
Additional PSION components (e.g., 3link cable and
C developmental user interface)
6GT2 094-0AB00 or
2 AA batteries
(NiCd, Ni-MH, alkali)
Obtain from local dealer or
PSION.
(http://www.psion.com/
industrial/)
Table 7-5 Technical data of the STG I hand-held terminal
Hardware
Processor
RAM memory
ROM memory
User program
NEC V30mx 27.68 MHz (80C86-compatible)
2 Mbytes of which approx. 1.8 Mbytes can be used as desired
2 Mbytes for operating system
1 Mbyte (with MOBY service and test program)
Monitor screen
Keyboard
Sound
Graphic LCD monitor screen with 240 x 100 pixels, gray-stage
scale, backlighting can be turned on
Alphanumeric with 57 keys
Piezo signal encoder
Power supply
Operation time
NiCd battery pack with 2 type-AA cells (850 mAh)
High-speed chargeable, automatic switch-off
20 hours
(read head inactive, display not lighted)
4.5 hours
(read head active, display not lighted)
10 hours
(read head inactive, display lighted)
Ordering data
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-12 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 7-5 Technical data of the STG I hand-held terminal
Interfaces LIF interface (LIF = Low Insertion Force) for battery charging
and communication with PC and printer (3link cable not inclu-
ded)
RS 232 and TTL interface for connection of a MOBY read
head
Security Locking mechanism for battery and program memory
Software
Operating system
File management
EPOC/16 multitasking, graphics support, GUI interface,
Interpreter similar to MS-DOS
MS-DOS-compatible
Integrated software
MOBY STG
program
MOBY service and test program, spread sheet calculation,
data base, pocket calculator, communication
Read, write, delete MDS, read MDS-ID. Store MDS data and
charge. Menus in German or
English. Entry and presentation of data in ASCII or HEX.
MOBY filehandler
program
Read, write, set up, delete files of the MDS and hand-held
terminal; display directory; format, lock MDS, status; display
for directory and editor
Technical Data Complete Device (Incl.
Batteries)
Read head
Dimensions
Weight
260 x 90 x 35 [mm]
Approx. 440 g
90 x 64 x 35 [mm]
Approx. 110 g
Temperature
Relative humidity
Type of protection
Shock resistance
EMC
Electrostatic, RF,
EFT
Certifications
During operation –20°C to +60°C
During transportation and storage –25°C to +80°C
(without battery)
0% to 90%, no condensation
IP54 (protected against splashed water)
Max. fall onto concrete: 1 m
EN 55022; FCC Part 15 Low Power Transmitter
IEC 801-2; IEC 801-3; IEC 801-4
ETS 300 330 reg. no. TTJ-P-G 128/96
FCC ID: KR5 MIS–I
RF Read/Write Head
MOBY I 134 kHz energy/1.81 MHz data
Maximum read/
i di
MDS Type Distance in mm
write distances 401/402
403
404/514
506
439E
6
8
20
12
12
A
ccessories
7-13
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Made in Germany
SIEMENS MOBY I STG I
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO
THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Note
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused
by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment:
Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC information
A
ccessories
7-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
7.4 Acquisition Station ES 030-K
Acquisition station ES 030-K is a microprocessor-controlled terminal for
general-purpose use in all sectors of industry. It offers several interfaces.
This station is particularly suitable for use with the MOBY I and MOBY L
identification systems and with barcodes to lessen the load of higher-level
host systems. Its modular design permits configuration of functions and de-
sign to meet the requirements of individual applications.
SCan be programmed as desired with PG and PC in programming language
STEP5
SDialog or process-oriented with keys which can be assigned as desired
SSturdy construction (IP54) for industrial environments (e.g., for control
even when operator is wearing protective gloves)
SFlexible hardware layout
SSerial interfaces (i.e., TTY, RS 485, (RS 422), and V.24) for connection to
higher-level computers, PLCs or printer with Lauf, 3964R, SINEC L1 and
PROFIBUS DP procedures
SAdditional interfaces for MOBY I and MOBY L identification systems,
barcode wands, scanners and swipe readers
SIntegrated function blocks for frequently used functions
SWith master/slave function for SINEC L1
Application area
Features/layout
A
ccessories
7-15
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Plug connector 3
LCD display
2 x 24 characters
LCD display
4 x 20 characters
Keyboard with
29 lighted keys
key-operated switch
Sealed keyboard with
30 keys, 30 LEDs
key-operated switch
Clock chip
MOBY I
SLG Interface
Barcode wand
Serial Interface
TTY and X.27
8 digital inputs/
8 digital outputs2
Serial expansion interface
TTY und V.242
8 digital inputs-/
8 digital outputs
16 digital inputs2
MOBY I
SLG Interface
Plug connector 4
Plug connector 1
Plug connector 2
MOBY I filehandler
SLG Interface
MOBY L
SLG Interface
MOBY L
SLG Interface
MOBY I filehandler
SLG Interface
O P T I O NO P T I O NO P T I O N
PLUG-IN OPTION
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
1
1
PLUG_IN OPTION
Figure 7-6 Configurator of ES 030-K
1 Each plug-in option is a hardware module requiring one slot on the ES 030-K.
2 The options “serial expansion interface” and “16 digital inputs” can also be led out on plug connector 2 as a special
version.
A
ccessories
7-16 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 7-6 Ordering data for ES 030-K
Acquisition station ES 030-K
with serial interface (TTY and X.27)
on plug connector 1
8 DI + 8 DO on plug connector 2
Display
Without display
LCD, 2 x 24 characters
LDC, 4 x 20 characters
Plug connector 3
Not used
MOBY I, MOBY E interface
8 DI + 8 DO
16 DI
MOBY I filehandler
MOBY L interface
PROFIBUS DP interface1
Serial interface (TTY, V.24)
Plug connector 4
Not used
Barcode (incl. wand)
MOBY I, MOBY E interface
MOBY I filehandler
MOBY L interface
Barcode (without wand)
PROFIBUS DP interface1
Keyboard
No Keyboard
Sealed Keyboard, 30 keys. 30 LEDs
Keyboard with 29 illuminated buttons
Charging kit for ES 030
6AW5 451- JJJJ3
0
1
2
A
C
D
E
F
L
P
S
A
B
C
F
L
N
P
0
2
3
6AW5 451-8AU
1 Alternate: Plug 4 recommended
Ordering data
A
ccessories
7-17
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 7-7 Technical data of ES 030-K
Microprocessor
Clock pulse frequency
Storage capacity (basic model)
EEPROM
RAM
80C32
14.7 MHz
32 Kbytes = 16 K instruction
128 Kbytes, battery-buffered for approx.
8 years (DB1-DB120)
Command set (STEP5) Almost same as SIMATIC 100U (e.g., lo-
gical link operations, storage operations,
load and transfer operations, time and
counting operations, comparison opera-
tions, and processing operations)
Display 2 x 24-character LCD or
4 x 20-character LCD
Digital inputs/outputs
Always included
Optional module
Optional module
SDigital input
SDigital output
8 DI and 8 DO, floating
8 DI and 8 DO, floating
16 DI, floating
Logical “0”: -2 to +2 V
Logical “1”: 16 to 33 V
(Ri = approx. 5 kΩ)
Common ground of all DI
Logical “1”: +24 V
I = 100 mA, I = 50 mA
Short-circuit proof
Common +24 V of all DO
Serial interface
(plug connector 1)
Procedure
Speed
Serial interface
(plug connector 3)
TTY or RS 485
3964R, Lauf, SINEC L1
150 to 19200 baud
Interface module
20 mA single current
Active/passive or V.24
Procedure: Lauf or 3964R
Fieldbus
Baud rate
Connection
PROFIBUS DP (slave) certified in acc. w.
part III of DIN 19245
9.6 kbaud to 1.5 Mbaud
9-pin sub D plug connector on plug con-
nector 4 (optionally on plug connector 3)
Connectable barcode interface (max. of 2) Reading wand, swipe reader, hand-held
laser scanner
MOBY I
Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 40/SLG 40-S
SLG 41/SLG 41-S/SLG 41C
SLG 42
SLG 43
SLG 44
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-18 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table 7-7 Technical data of ES 030-K
MOBY L
Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 52
Connection to SIMATIC S5 RS 485, V.24, TTY or SINEC L1
Keyboard
Push-button keyboard 29 illuminated push-buttons
1 key-operated switch
Sealed keyboard 30 keys, 30 LEDs
1 key-operated switch
Power connection, normal 230 V AC, +10%; 48 to 62 Hz
Grounding-type plug connector in acc. w.
DIN 49441
Optional 24 V DC (20 to 30 V)
Current consumption Approx. 20 VA
RAM/clock backup Backup battery for approx. 8 years
Interference suppression Interference class B in acc. w. VDE 0871
Protection rating IP54
Ambient temperature
Operation 0° to +40° C
Transportation and storage –40° to +70° C
Relative humidity Up to 95%
Housing Die-cast zinc
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 180 x 280 x 95
Weight (approx.) 5 kg
Silicone free Yes
A
ccessories
7-19
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
ES 030-K
Basic model with 8 DI/DO and
serial interface, without display
and without keyboard (e.g., to
address a switch)
Serial interface/RS 422
SIMATIC S5/CP 544
Serial
interface
TTY
A0.1
MDS
SLG SLG SLG
MDS MDS
ES 030-K
Basic model with 8 DI/DO and
serial interface, with LCD indica-
tion and sealed keyboard and
MOBY I or MOBY L for quality
data
ES 303-K (only slave)
PLC
(master)
PROFIBUS DP
Station
120 Station
14
Serial connec-
tion for barcode
scanner DI/DO Manual input
SIMATIC S5/S7
D
P
ES 030-K
PC
(master)
L1
Type 2 Type 3
DI/DO
L1 L1
ES 030-K
Basic model with 8 DI/DO and
serial interface, with LCD indi-
cation and push-buttons or
sealed keyboard
Serial interface PC/PLC
A0.1
A0.0E0.0
TTY/RS485
ES 030-K
Basic model with serial inter-
face (L1), with LCD, sealed
keyboard, barcode wand
MOBY I
interface
Barcode
L1
SLG
MDS
1234567
Ex:
station 11
Serial connec-
tion for barcode
scanner Manual input
Figure 7-7 Sample configuration of ES 030-K
A
ccessories
7-20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
A
ccessories
A-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Documentation
Starting 10.01.2004, the technical documentation of MOBY is only available
electronically on the “Software MOBY” CD with the order number
6GT2 080-2AA10.
SDescription ASM 400/401 (German/English)
SDescription ASM 410 (German/English)
SDescription ASM 450/FC 44 (German/English/French)
SDescription FC 45 (German/English/French)
SDescription ASM 451/FC 46 (German/English)
SDescription FC 56 (German/English)
SDescription FB 246 (German)
SDescription ASM 470/FC 47 for SIMATIC S7 (German/English)
SDescription ASM470/FB 47 for SIMATIC S5 (German/English)
SDescription SIM (for SIM 4x) (German/English)
SDescription FB 230 (German/English)
SDescription FB 240 (German/English)
SDescription FB 250 for ASM 400/401 (German/English)
SDescription 3964 R for Win 95/NT (German/English)
SDescription T3964R for DOS (German/English)
SDescription MOBY API (German/English)
SDescription MDS 439 E (German/English)
SOperator control guide for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/
German) (also included with STG I)
SProgramming instructions for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/
German)
SConfiguration manual SLG 44/MDS 507/MDS 407 E (German/English)
SEquipment manual for ES 030-K (German/English)
Technical
descriptions
Operator control
guides
Manuals
A
A-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Documentation
B-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Error Messages
This appendix contains a list of MOBY I error messages. These messages are
divided into three groups.
B.1 Error numbers 01 hex to 1F hex are described in the first section.
These messages are the same for all interfaces which use direct MDS
addressing.
B.2 Some function blocks (e.g., FB 250, FB 240, FC 45 and FC 47) pro-
vide additional messages on the status of the hardware. These special
messages are described in this section.
B.3 All filehandler messages are grouped in the third section. These mes-
sages apply to ASM 401 with FB 230 as well as ASM 452, ASM 473
and ASM 475 with FC 46, FC 56.
B
B-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B.1 General Errors
The following error codes can occur during MOBY I operation. They are
transferred in the status byte during telegram communication or via the red
LED on the front plate. On most ASM modules, this LED always indicates
the last error even when this error has already been corrected.
On ASM 450, ASM 452, the error codes can also be optionally reported via
PROFIBUS as device-related diagnoses.
FC 45 images this error code with the “error_MOBY” variable.
Error Messa
g
es
B-3
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-1 General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
LED Cause/Remedy SIN1
00 00 No error. Result is okay. 0000
– 01 See error code 0F.
01 02 Presence error. MDS has moved out of the transmission window of the SLG. The
MOBY command could only be executed partially.
Read command: No data are supplied to the computer.
Write command: The data memory which just left the field contains an
incomplete data record.
–> Sa (operating distance from SLG to MDS) not adhered to
–> Configuration error: Data block to be processed is too large (during dynamic
operation).
The next command (READ, WRITE or NEXT) is automatically related to the next
MDS.
Remark:
The red error LED on the front plate shows error code 02.
0003
02 02 Presence error
–> A mobile data memory has passed by the SLG and was not processed with a
command or concluded with the NEXT command.
–> An INIT command was aborted with RESET.
This error message cannot be transferred until the next command (read, write, status,
RESET, DI/DO or NEXT). The command is not executed but causes this error mes-
sage. The ASM executes the next command correctly again.
Error 02 is reported immediately via external diagnosis.
Remark:
The red error LED does not distinguish between errors 01 and 02. See error code
01.
0005
03 03 Error in the connection to the SLG
–> Supply voltage of ASM < 20 V or not connected
–> 24 V voltage has voltage drops.
–> Fuse on ASM has triggered. Check wiring.
–> Cable between ASM and SLG is wired incorrectly or a cable break has
occurred.
–> Hardware defect (ASM or SLG)
–> Another SLG in the vicinity is active.
–> Interference on SLG cable or bus cable
0040
04 04 Error in memory of the MDS
The data memory has never been write-accessed or has lost its contents due to a
battery failure.
–> Initialize data memory with STG.
–> With ASM: Call initialization command.
–> Check battery of MDS or replace MDS (battery bit).
–> Data memory is defective.
–> Initialization was performed with wrong memory size.
0041
05 05 Unknown command code in byte 2 of the telegram
MDS reports address error. Check telegram.
0002/
0004
Error Messa
g
es
B-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-1 General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
SIN1
Cause/RemedyLED
06 06 Field interference on SLG
The SLG is receiving interference pulses from its surroundings.
–> External interference field. The interference field can be located with the
inductive field indicator of the STG:
–> The distance between two SLGs is too short and does not correspond to
configuration guidelines.
–> The connection cable to the SLG has malfunctioned, is too long or does not
meet specifications.
0044
07 07 Too many sending errors
The MDS could not receive the command or the write data from the SLG correctly
even after several attempts.
–> The MDS is located in the boundary area of the transmission window.
–> The data transmission to the MDS is being affected by external interference.
0045
08 08 CRC sending error
– The monitoring circuit has detected an error during sending.
–> Cause same as error 06
– The MDS reports CRC errors very frequently.
–> The MDS is located in the boundary area of the SLG.
–> The MDS and/or the SLG have a hardware defect.
0044
09 09 Only for initialization. CRC error during acknowledgment receipt from MDS
–> Cause same as error 06
–
0A 10 Only for initialization. MDS cannot execute INIT command.
–> MDS is defective.
–
0B 11 Only for initialization. Timeout while initializing the MDS
–> MDS is located exactly on the boundary of the transmission window.
–> The MDS is using too much current (i.e., defective).
–> Only for MDS 507. MDS 507 operation was not enabled with the
“RESET with parameter transfer” command.
–
0C 12 Memory of the MDS can no longer be written.
–> Memory of MDS is defective.
–> EEPROM–type MDS was write-accessed too often and has reached the end
of its life.
–> An incorrect end address was parameterized for the INIT command.
0046
0D 13 Address error (address area exceeded)
–> Specified address does not exist on the MDS.
–> Check and correct the command for telegram layout.
–> The status byte is not 00 for the command.
0002/
0004
0E 14 ECC error
The data could not be read from the MDS.
–> MDS data have been lost (i.e., MDS defective).
–> The MDS was not initialized with the ECC driver.
–> Initialize MDS.
–> MDS with EEPROM has reached the end of its life. The data have been lost.
–> Replace MDS.
–> The MDS moved out of the field during a write-access.
–> The MDS is not positioned correctly.
–> Command to ASM was issued incorrectly by the user.
0047
Error Messa
g
es
B-5
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-1 General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
SIN1
Cause/RemedyLED
0F 01 Startup message
The ASM always sends this message after every startup. A startup is considered
performed after operational voltage is applied, after the front switch is activated,
after a reset via plug connector X1 or after a bus error. The startup message is retai-
ned until the user issues a RESET command to the ASM. This enables the user to
recognize when voltage returns to the ASM (i.e., readiness for operation).
10 16 NEXT command is not possible or is not permitted.
–> ASM is operating without the presence check.
–> ASM has already received a NEXT command.
1043
11 17 Short circuit or overload of the 24 V outputs
Next command must be a RESET command.
–> The affected output is switched off.
–> All 24 V outputs are switched off when a total overload occurs.
–> A reset can only be performed by turning the supply voltage off and on
again.
12 18 Internal ASM communication error
The connection to the MOBY processor has malfunctioned. Next command must be
a RESET command.
–> Hardware of ASM is defective.
–> EMC interference
14 20 Internal ASM error
Stack overflow. Next command must be a RESET command.
–> Turn 24 V supply off and on again.
15 21 Erroneous operational parameterization
–> Check switch on ASM.
16 22 The command cannot be executed with the current bus configuration.
–> Input or output areas are too small for the telegram length used.
–> Read or write command with excessive length used
–> Adjust bus configuration of the master module.
17 23 Handshake error
Next command must be a RESET command.
–> The user set an incorrect bit in the command byte of the telegram during the
handshake procedure.
–> Check user program and correct.
18 24 Only RESET command permitted
–> An error has occurred which must be acknowledged with a RESET
command. Cause may be a brief short circuit on PROFIBUS.
Error Messa
g
es
B-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-1 General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
SIN1
Cause/RemedyLED
19 25 Previous command is active.
A new command was issued to the ASM although the last command is still active.
–> An active command can only be terminated with a RESET command.
–> The new command is concluded with error 19 hex. The old command is
executed by the ASM, and the finished message is reported after completion.
0042
1A 26 PROFIBUS DP error has occurred.
–> Bus connection has been interrupted (e.g., wire break or plug pulled).
–> Master no longer addresses the ASM.
–> The error is reported as soon as the bus connection is restored again.
1E 30 – The telegram does not have the correct format.
– AB byte does not correspond to the user data length.
–> Check and correct the telegrams in the user program.
–
1F 31 Communication with the MDS was terminated with a RESET. This error can only be
reported back with a RESET command.
–
20 (binary
xx1x xxxx)
32 Not an error message
Only occurs when working with the ECC driver enabled. It indicates that the driver
recognized and corrected a 1-bit error. The read/write data are okay.
00522
40 (binary
x1xx xxxx)
64 Not an error message
This bit is normally always set. It is reserved for the status indication of a 2nd bat-
tery on the MDS.
00512
80 (binary
1xxx xxxx)
128 Not an error message
Battery voltage of the MDS has fallen below the threshold value. Immediate repla-
cement of the MDS is recommended.
This status bit is always set for EEPROM-type MDSs.
When SINUMERIK is involved, the battery message is provided in IDENTIFICA-
TION without the “F“ ID. To detect poor battery stats, the “fnr” field can be evalua-
ted at one location for the entire system.
00502
1 SIN = Equivalent error number for SIM in SINUMERIK operating mode
2 When several states occur at the same time, the following sequence applies: 0052, 0050 and 0051.
Error Messa
g
es
B-7
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B.2 ASM-Related Errors
B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250
The messages shown in table B-2 are indicated in data word 5 of FBDB.
Table B-2 Error messags of FB 250
Error Message Cause/Remedy
Bit 1 = “1”:
Synchronization error
SFB 250 has received the result for a command which is not located in ZUWDB
(i.e., not at this location). The pointer (ZUW) to ZUWDB may have been
changed while a command was active.
SEMC effects have caused the ASM to execute another command than pro-
grammed by the user.
–> Check the entire SIMATIC system. Check the grounding concept.
Bit 2 = “1”:
FB 250 is synchronized
(SYNCH)
General communication capability with a channel module of the ASM 400 module.
This bit is set after a positive check of the FB parameterization.
This takes place during the 1st RESET immediately after bootstrap loading of the
programs and data blocks. When a RESET command does not function, the bit is
not set or reset.
ASM 400 module cannot be addressed by the FB.
SWrong address set on the ASM 400
SASM 400 is defective.
–> A RESET must always be performed after the sync bit is reset.
Bit 4 = “1”:
Parameterization error
SThe “ADR” parameter does not contain the correct values.
SThe “KAN” parameter is specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 1 or 2.
SThe “TYP” parameter was specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 0, 1, 3, 5,
and 6.
SThe “ANW” parameter is not “0” or “1”.
SThe command is not permitted in ZUWDB.
Bit 5 = “1”:
ASM error
SThe exact ASM error is located in bits 8 to 15 of ANZ.
If bits 8 to 15 = 0:
SThe FB did not receive an acknowledgment from the ASM in time after com-
mand transfer.
SFB 250 was not called by the user within 4 seconds after command start (no cy-
clic FB call).
SThe user changed data in the FBDB (DW 0 to DW 24) – particularly DW 0/1.
Error Messa
g
es
B-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-2 Error messags of FB 250
Error Message Cause/Remedy
Bit 6 = “1”:
Time error
Loop counter monitor in FB 250 has been triggered.
SThe command data could not be or could not be completely transferred to the
ASM 400.
SThe ASM 400 cannot be addressed by the FB. The “ADR” parameter may not
correspond to switch setting S3 on the ASM 400.
SLength = 0 was transferred with a write command.
SThe “AG” parameter is set incorrectly.
SThe user has changed data in FBDB (particularly DW 0/1).
–> Check ASM 400 hardware, addressing parameterization and user program.
Bit 7 = “1”:
Repetition error
The command to the ASM 400 was repeated.
SError in BEST = 0
The command was not concluded correctly after command repetition (not an
error).
SError in BEST = 1
Communication malfunction between ASM and FB 250. Despite command
repetition, the command still could not be executed correctly.
When the repetition bit is set sporadically, all hardware must be checked. Special
attention should be paid to the grounding concept.
Bits 8 to 12 Error message as shown in table B-1
Bit 13 = “1” ECC offset was performed.
Bit 14 = “1” Dialog battery of MDS 507 has dropped below threshold value.
Bit 15 = “1” RAM battery has dropped below threshold value.
Error Messa
g
es
B-9
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47
The indication word for FC 47 is DBB 6/7.
The indication word for FB 47 is DW 3.
SMOBY errors are indicated in DBB 6 or DL 3. Cf. table B-1.
SInternal errors of the function block are indicated in DBB 7 or DR 3. Cf.
table B-3. The red LED does not flash for these error messages from
FB 47/FC 47. The contents of the byte are specified in hexadecimal for-
mat (i.e., HEX) and as fixed point numbers (i.e., DEC).
Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47
ANZ
(Right-
Hand
Byte)
Description
02 HEX/
02 DEC
Illegal command code or command parameter was entered.
SParameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the command description.
06 HEX/
06 DEC
The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not identical.
SASM 470 not parameterized correctly
SInternal processing error
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
07 HEX/
07 DEC
Synchronization error during execution of FB 47/FC 47
SInternal processing error
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
08 HEX/
08 DEC
The parameterized user data length of the read/write command and the user data length received in the
acknowledgment are not identical.
SASM 470 not parameterized correctly
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
09 HEX/
09 DEC
The received or written user data are too long.
SASM 470 not parameterized correctly
SRead command: The length specified for the data to be read is too long. Maximum of 12 bytes is
permitted.
10 HEX/
10 DEC
Read or written user data length too short. User data length is 0 bytes.
SInternal processing error
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
17 HEX/
17 DEC
The formal operands of FB 47/FC 47 were parameterized incorrectly.
SParameterize FB 47/FC 47 correctly.
SThen start RESET command.
19 HEX/
19 DEC
FB 47/FC 47 reports that only a RESET command is permitted as the next command.
SNo RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 470.
SNo RESET was performed after an error message after which a
RESET must be the next command.
SStart RESET command.
Error Messa
g
es
B-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47
ANZ
(Right-
Hand
Byte)
Description
20 HEX/
20 DEC
Synchronization error between ASM 470 and FB 47/FC 47
SThe handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams is out of step. There may be a con-
tact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable.
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
SStart RESET command.
21 HEX/
21 DEC
ASM 470 has performed a startup.
SThere may be a problem with the plug-in contact of the ASM 470 in the S7-300.
SSupply voltage of the ASM 470 is unstable.
SInterference pulse
SDEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
SStart RESET command.
1B HEX/
27 DEC1
SThe data field (i.e., number of user data bytes) between DAT-Z and the end of DATDB is less than
the length given in the write command (DR 4 in BEDB). Exception: DATDB consists of 256 data
words (DW 0 to DW 255).
SDAT-Z must be adjusted to the user data length. Make DAT-Z smaller.
SReduce length of read/write data.
SStart RESET command.
1 Can only occur with FB 47
Error Messa
g
es
B-11
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240
The error indications (ANZ) of FB 240 are located in data word DW 2 of the
BEDB.
SThe MOBY errors listed in table B-1 are located in the left-hand byte of
the data word (DL 2).
SInternal FB errors are located in the right-hand byte of the data word
(DR 2). The red LED does not flash for these FB 240 error messages.
The contents of the byte are specified in binary format, in hexadecimal
format (H) and as fixed point numbers (D).
Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240
ANZ (Right-
Hand Byte)
Description
00000010
(02H/02D)
Illegal command code or command parameter was entered.
SParameterize data words in BEDB correctly as specified in the command description.
00000110
(06H/06D)
The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not identical.
SInput and output area of the ASM 450 is too small.
SParameterize master module correctly.
00000111
(07H/07D)
The received acknowledgment is too long.
SInput and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (check GSD file).
SRead command: The length of the data to be read is too long.
SParameterize master module correctly.
00001000
(08H/08D)
The parameterized length of the user data of the read/write command and the user data length recei-
ved in the acknowledgment are not identical.
SInput and output area of the ASM 450 is too small.
SParameterize master module correctly.
00001001
(09H/09D)
The length of the received user data is too long.
SInput and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (check GSD file).
SRead command: The length of the data to be read is too long.
SParameterize master module correctly.
00010001
(11H/17D)
The formal operands of FB 240 were parameterized incorrectly or the parameterization in the
EPROM of IM 308-B is wrong.
SParameterize FB 240 correctly.
SParameterize master module correctly. Check the “ADR” parameter in particular.
SThen start RESET command.
00010011
(13H/19D)
FB 240 reports that only a RESET is permitted as the next command.
SNo RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 450.
SNo RESET was performed after an error message which requires a RESET as the next command.
SStart RESET command.
Error Messa
g
es
B-12 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240
ANZ (Right-
Hand Byte)
Description
00010100
(14H/20D)
Synchronization error between ASM 450 and FB 240
SThe handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams is out of step. There may be a
contact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable.
SStart RESET command.
00010101
(15H/21D)
The ASM 450 has performed a startup or a PROFIBUS DP bus error has occurred.
SPossible problem with the ASM 450’s plug-in contacts in the module rack
SSupply voltage of the ASM 450 is unstable.
SInterference pulse on the reset input of base connector X1
SPROFIBUS DP error occurred (e.g., bus connection interrupted)
SStart RESET command.
Error Messa
g
es
B-13
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B.2.4 Error Indication with FC 45
FC 45 shows the error codes in 3 variables.
Serror_MOBY: MOBY error in acc. w. table B-1
Serror_FC: Errors generated by FC 45 due to wrong
parameterization (cf. table B-5)
Serror_BUS: Errors reported by system functions SFC 58/59
(cf. table B-6)
Table B-5 Error variable error_FC
error_FC
(B#8#..)
Description
00 No error. Standard value if everything’s okay.
01 SIMATIC does not have Params_DB.
02 Params_DB is too small.
⇒UDT 10/11 was not used for the definition.
⇒Params_DB must be 300 bytes long (for each channel).
⇒Check Params_DB and Params_ADDR for correctness.
03 SIMATIC does not have the DB after the “command_DB_number” pointer.
04 The “command_DB” on SIMATIC is too small.
⇒UDT 20/21 was not used for the command definition.
⇒The last command in “command_DB” is a chained command. Reset the chaining bit.
05 Invalid command type
06 The acknowledgment received is not the acknowledgment expected. The parameters of command
and acknowledgment telegram do not match (command, length, address_MDS).
⇒The user changed the “command_DB_number/command_DB_address” pointer while the
command was being processed.
⇒The user changed the command parameters in data block MOBY CMD (UDT 20) while the
command was being pro-
cessed.
07 The MOBY_mode parameter (defined in UDT 10) has an illegal value.
08 A bus error is reported by system functions SFC 58/59. Variable
error_Bus contains more information on the error.
09 The ASM failed.
⇒Power failure on the MOBY-ASM
⇒PROFIBUS plug pulled or PROFIBUS cable disconnected
The error is indicated when the ASM_Failure bit was set in OB 122. OB 122 is called when FC 45 is
no longer able to access the cyclic word for the MOBY-ASM.
0A While the init_run command was being executed, the user started another init_run command without
waiting for “ready.”
⇒Do not set init_run cyclically.
Error Messa
g
es
B-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-5 Error variable error_FC
error_FC
(B#8#..)
Description
0B Init_run cannot be executed. Cyclic process image to the ASM is faulty. FC 45 reports timeout of PII.
(This error can be eliminated by writing #00 to address DBB 58 in UDT 10. However, in certain
error situations, FC 45 won’t generate an error message and will ”hang up.”)
⇒ASM_address in UDT 10 is parameterized incorrectly. ASM_address may be pointing to a
wrong module.
⇒ASM hardware/firmware is faulty.
0C Area length error. Error_BUS contains the error 8x22 or 8x23.
⇒DAT_DB doesn’t exist or is parameterized too small. Check DAT_DB_number and
DAT_DB_address in UDT 20.
⇒Perform init_run.
Table B-6 Error variable error_Bus
Error Code
(W#16#...)
Description
800A ASM is not ready. Temporary message.
⇒This message is received by the user who is not using FC 45 and who is polling the ASM non-
cyclically very quickly in succession.
8x7F Internal error in parameter x. Cannot be corrected by the user.
8x22
8x23
Area length error while reading a parameter
Area length error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that parameter x is completely or partially outside the operand range or the
length of a bit field of an ANY parameter is not divisible by 8.
8x24
8x25
Area error while reading a parameter
Area error while writing a parameter
This error code indicates that parameter x is located in an area which is illegal for the system func-
tion.
8x26 The parameter contains a number of a time cell which is too large.
8x27 The parameter contains a number of a counter cell which is too large.
8x28
8x29
Orientation error while reading a parameter
Orientation error while writing a parameter
The reference to parameter x is an operand whose bit address is not 0.
8x30
8x31
The parameter is located in the write-protected global DB.
The parameter is located in the write-protected instance DB.
8x32
8x34
8x35
The parameter has a DB number which is too large.
The parameter has an FC number which is too large.
The parameter has an FB number which is too large.
8x3A
8x3C
8x3E
The parameter has the number of a DB which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FC which is not loaded.
The parameter has the number of an FB which is not loaded.
Error Messa
g
es
B-15
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-6 Error variable error_Bus
Error Code
(W#16#...)
Description
8x42
8x43
An access error occurred while the system was trying to read a parameter from the I/O area of the
inputs.
An access error occurred while the system was trying to write a parameter to the I/O area of the out-
puts.
8x44
8x45
Error during nth (n>1) read access after an error occurred
Error during nth (n>1) write access after an error occurred
8090 Specified logical base address is invalid. No assignment exists in SDB1/SDB2x or it isn’t a base
address.
8092 A type other than BYTE is specified in ANY reference.
8093 The area identifier contained in the configuration (SDB1, SDB2x) of the logical address is not per-
mitted for these SFCs. Permitted:
0 = S7-400
1 = S7-300
2.7 = DP modules
80A0 Negative acknowledgment while reading from the module (module removed during the read proce-
dure or module is defective)
80A1 Negative acknowledgment while writing to the module (module removed during the write procedure
or module is defective)
80A2 DP protocol error in layer 2. Hardware may be defective.
80A3 DP protocol error in Direct-Data-Link-Mapper or User-Interface/User. Hardware may be defective.
80B0 SSFC not possible for this module type
SModule doesn’t recognize the data record.
S A data record number w241 is illegal.
SData records 0 and 1 are not permitted for SFC58 “WR_REC.”
80B1 The length in the RECORD parameter is wrong.
80B2 Although configured, the slot is not occupied.
80B3 Actual module type is not the module type configured in SDB1.
80C0 SRD REC: The module has the data record but no read data yet.
SWR REC: ASM is not ready for new data.
⇒ Wait for the cyclic counter to be incremented.
80C1 The module has not yet processed the data of the previous write job for the same data record.
80C2 The module is currently processing the maximum number of jobs for a CPU.
80C3 Required resources (memory, etc.) not available at the moment.
80C4 Communication error
SParity error
SSW-Ready not set
SError in block length management
SChecksum error on CPU side
SChecksum error on module side
80C5 Distributed I/O not available
Error Messa
g
es
B-16 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
B.3 Filehandler Error Messages for ASM 401/452/473/475
These error messages are indicated by FB 230, FB 246, FC 46 and FC 56.
Table B-7 Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
A0 06 The command ID (KK) of the started command is not permitted or not defined. Specify the correct
command ID.
A0 11 The telegram monitoring parameters (DBN or KK) are not being sent in the correct order. Two or
more telegrams are being written in the same page frame memory area. Parameterization of the FB
call parameters (“SSNR” and “KAN”) must be checked for all channels.
SFor 1st command block: DBN (i.e., byte 8/9 in the telegram) does not have the value 0001.
SFor next block: DBN of the user is not in correct ascending sequence or the KK parameter
(i.e., byte 4) does not correspond to the command just executed.
A0 15 Check byte mode is enabled. The check byte generated by FB 230 does not correspond to the
command telegram. Correction same as A0 11.
A0 16 The filehandler is executing the commands of another user (e.g., the STG, can be recognized in bit 6
(“STG active/ASM test”) of BEST). Command execution is delayed until the other user finishes.
Start command again if necessary.
B0 01 Error in connection to the SLG
SCable between ASM and SLG is incorrectly wired, or a cable break has occurred.
S24 V supply voltage is not connected or has been turned off.
SFuse on the ASM 401 is defective.
SHardware defect: Channel module or SLG
This error does not occur during the start of system commands (i.e., RESET, NEXT and
ASM STATUS).
B0 02 EAKO 1:
SA command was started, but there is no MDS in the transmission window of the SLG.
EAKO 0:
SThe old/current MDS has left the transmission window, and the new/next MDS has
entered the transmission window. A command was started (not NEXT). This com-
mand refers to the new MDS, but the old/current MDS has not yet been concluded
with NEXT.
SA new MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG but leaves it again without
a command being executed for this MDS (i.e., an MDS has “slipped through”).
C0 02 The MDS reports a memory error.
SReplace MDS if the battery monitoring bit is set
STest MDS by attempting to initialize it with the STG
SFormat MDS with FORMAT
Error Messa
g
es
B-17
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-7 Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
C0 06 During certain important procedures (e.g., write system area of the MDS or format MDS), the MDS
may not leave the transmission window of the SLG or the command will be terminated with this
error message.
SStart command again.
SMDS is located in the boundary area of the SLG transmission window.
SEAKO = 1: MDS was not located in the transmission window of the SLG when the command
was started.
C0 07 SThe FORMAT or TRACE command was issued with the wrong parameters. This physical ad-
dress given in the command does not exist on the MDS. MDS memory is smaller than specified
in the command.
SREAD/WRITE/UPDATE: Pointer in the FAT is faulty. It indicates a block which does not exist
on the MDS.
C0 08 Field interference on the SLG. The SLG is receiving interference from its surroundings. Some
sources are listed below.
SExternal field of interference. The interference field can be documented with the “inductive field
indicator” of the STG.
SThe distance between two SLGs is too short and does not adhere to configuration guidelines.
SThe connection cable to the SLG has malfunctioned, is too long or does not meet specifications.
C0 09 Too many sending errors have occurred. The MDS could not receive the command or the write data
from the ASM correctly even after several attempts.
SThe MDS is located exactly in the boundary area of the transmission window.
SThe data transmission to the MDS is being affected by external interference.
C0 10 SCRC sending error. The monitor receiving circuit has detected an error while information was
being sent. Error cause same as C0 08.
SThe MDS reports CRC errors very frequently. The MDS is located in the boundary area, or the
MDS or SLG is defective.
C0 11 Same as C0 08
C0 12 The MDS is unable to perform the FORMAT command. The MDS is defective.
C0 13 While being formatted, the MDS must remain in the transmission window of the SLG. Otherwise a
timeout error will occur. This means:
SThe MDS is located exactly in the boundary area of the transmission window.
SThe MDS is using too much current (i.e., is defective).
SThe EEPROM-MDS type is parameterized incorrectly for FORMAT.
C0 14 The memory of the MDS cannot be written. This means:
SThe MDS has a smaller memory than specified in the FORMAT command (i.e., parameterize the
MDS type correctly).
SThe memory of the MDS is defective.
SThe EEPROM-type MDS has been write-accessed too often and has reached the end of its life.
C0 15 Address error. The address area of the MDS was exceeded.
SThe MDS is not the right type.
Error Messa
g
es
B-18 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-7 Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
C0 16 An ECC error has occurred. The data cannot be read from the MDS.
SData of the MDS have been lost (i.e., MDS is defective).
SThe MDS was not formatted with the ECC driver. Format the MDS again.
SAn EEPROM-type MDS has reached the end of its life, and the data have been lost. Replace the
MDS.
SThe MDS moved out of the field while being write-accessed. The MDS is not positioned cor-
rectly. Remember: The system area of the MDS is automatically written on every SLG station.
C0 17 The filehandler is not working correctly.
SCheck command layout or command sequence.
SThe hardware of the ASM 401 (firmware) has a defect.
D0 01 The filehandler will only accept a RESET command.
SThe filehandler has not yet been initialized with a RESET command.
SThis state can only be canceled with a RESET command.
D0 05 The FORMAT, CREATE, WRITE, ATTRIB, UPDATE, COVER, QUEUE-READ or
QUEUE-WRITE commands were issued with illegal parameters.
SFORMAT with illegal MDS name or MDS type
SCREATE with illegal file name
SWRITE/UPDATE with length 0 (DLNG = 0)
SIllegal attribute
SQUEUE-READ or QUEUE-WRITE with illegal option
SCOVER with illegal user (only 0 or 1 permitted)
D0 07 SThe system data transferred with the LOAD command are incorrect.
–DLNG parameterized incorrectly for LOAD
–Wrong data block specified or incorrectly parameterized
– MOVE command executed incorrectly. DIR + FAT on the MDS do not correspond to the
checksum.
SThe MOVE command cannot be executed. The checksum does not
correspond to DIR + FAT. The data memory probably left the transmission window while sys-
tem operations (e.g., write DIR + FAT) were being executed, or the data structure of the MDS is
wrong.
D0 09 The RESET command was transferred to the filehandler with the wrong parameters.
SCheck bytes 11 to 17 of the telegram
D0 14 WRITE command: Sufficient memory space on the MDS is no longer available. The data are
not completely written to the MDS.
CREATE command: No further data blocks can be reserved for creation of a file.
No more blocks are free.
D0 15 The filehandler was unable to identify the MDS. The MDS must be formatted again.
D0 18 The logical address specified for the address is located outside the file. The FAT contains an error.
The MDS must be formatted again.
D0 22 The data memory has been covered with the COVER command. A write command (e.g., UPDATE
and CREATE) may not be allowed to destroy the data memory layout and is thus rejected.
D0 23 COVER command: The MDS name specified in the command does not match the actual
MDS name.
Error Messa
g
es
B-19
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-7 Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
E0 01 SThe type of MDS in front of the SLG does not correspond to the set ECC mode. The MDS must
be formatted again in accordance with the desired ECC mode.
SThe MDS is not a filehandler MDS. Format the MDS again.
E0 02 No more directory entries are free. The file specified with the CREATE command can no longer be
created.
E0 03 The file specified with the CREATE command already exists in the directory. Two files with the
same name are not permitted.
E0 05 SA FAT block sequence error has been determined for a READ or WRITE command. The file
allocation table (FAT) is faulty. The MDS must be formatted again.
SWrong address given for the TRACE command.
F0 01 SThe file addressed by a command (e.g., WRITE) does not exist in the directory. The file must be
set up with CREATE.
SCheck file name. It may not be in ASCII format.
SOne or more files are to be read with QUEUE-READ but these files do not exist on the MDS.
Valid data were not transferred to the user.
F0 05 Write-access (WRITE, UPDATE or DELETE) to a file which may not be changed (i.e., protected by
an appropriate attribute).
SUse the ATTRIB command to change the access rights, and then start the WRITE/UPDATE/
DELETE command again.
F0 06 The RWD switch on the ASM does not have sufficient rights for this command. The command was
ignored. Check the switch.
F0 07 QUEUE-READ: File length specified is shorter than the file length.
F0 08 QUEUE-READ: The skip calculated by the filehandler is greater than 0FFF hex (4095 decimal).
H1 01 The FB 230 call parameter or the DATDB/DATDW was parameterized incorrectly for the
absolute call.
Change the FB parameter in the calling program, and start a RESET command.
H1 02 SThe length of the loaded BEDB is less than 50 data words (i.e., FB 230 does not have sufficient
space for the internal FB parameters). A new BEDB with the correct length must be loaded.
Then start a RESET command.
SThe FB 230 for this type of PLC was not called (i.e., FB 230 for PLC 115U, FB 231 for
PLC 135U and FB 233 for PLC 155U).
SFC 56: Params_DB is too small.
H0 03 The command index is illegal. Change the command index.
H0 04 This command ID and thus this command is unknown to FB/FC. Check the command ID.
H0 05 The access rights of the corresponding SLG do not permit this command. For example, when
“R” access rights (i.e., read only) were granted to the SLG, WRITE commands cannot be executed
for this SLG. Either the “RWD” FB parameter must be changed (and then a RESET command
started to accept the change), or a legal command must be started.
H0 06 The WRITE/UPDATE/LOAD/QUEUE-WRITE or QUEUE-READ command parameter specified in
DW 9 (DLNG) of the DEDB is not permitted. Only a user data length of 7FF0 hex (32752 decimal)
is permitted or a maximum of 210 decimal bytes for QUEUE-READ. Change DLNG accordingly.
Error Messa
g
es
B-20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-7 Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
H1 07 The data block specified in DW 1 (BEDB) does not exist on the PLC. The applicable data block
must be loaded. Then start a RESET command so that the absolute addresses can be calculated.
H1 08 This is a pure software error which cannot occur during normal operation. A RESET command must
be started if this error does occur anyway. Two or more telegrams are written in the same page frame
memory area. This means:
SCheck actual FB 230 operands, particularly SSNR” and KAN.”
SThe user program contains an error.
SCheck the hardware.
– SIMATIC bus
– ASM 401 – basic module and/or channel module
– SIMATIC CPU
H1 09 The check byte of the acknowledgment telegram which was read and the check byte calculated by
FB 230 do not match (if check byte mode was enabled). A RESET command must be started. For
remedy, see also H1 08.
H1 10 The channel module has performed a hardware reset. This could have been caused by a voltage drop
in the device rack or a plug-in contact problem, for example. The user must start a RESET command
to parameterize the SLG again.
H1 11 The acknowledgment which was received has absolutely no connection with running operation.
This is a pure software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. A
RESET command must be started if this error should occur anyway. For remedy, see also H1 08.
H1 12 The command ID of the command and the corresponding acknowledgment do not match. This is a
software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. A RESET command
must be started if this error should occur anyway. For remedy, see also H1 08.
H1 13 The first command block was not acknowledged correctly (i.e., the telegram monitoring parameters
do not match). This is a pure software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal
operation. A RESET command must be started if this error should occur anyway. For remedy, see
also H1 08.
H1 14 An error was determined while reading the interface monitoring register. This means that
synchronization no longer exists between writing command blocks and reading corresponding
acknowledgments. This is usually caused by a plug-in contact problem of the channel module.
A RESET command must be started to set synchronization again. For remedy, see also H1 08.
H1 15 The pointer to the start address of the user data calculated from the DATDB and DATDW (DW 1 in
BEDB) parameters is located outside the specified data block (i.e., the pointer is too long). Either
DATDW must be shortened, or the DATDB must be lengthened. Then start a RESET command.
H1 16 The telegram monitoring parameters of the command and acknowledgment blocks do not match.
This is a pure software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. If this
error occurs anyway, a RESET command must be started. For remedy, see H1 08.
H1 17 See error H1 16.
Error Messa
g
es
B-21
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-7 Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
H1 18 While a command is being executed (i.e., ready bit not yet set), the pointer to the start address of the
data calculated from DATDB and DATDW was changed, and the absolute addresses are no longer
correct. A RESET command must be started to calculate the absolute addresses again.
H1 19 The absolute address which is accessed for reading and writing the data block is located outside the
data block. Either the data block must be lengthened, or the pointer to the start address of the user
data (DATDB and DATDW) must be corrected (i.e., give the data block more space). Then start a
RESET command.
H1 20 During running operation (i.e., FB 230 is being called cyclically), the PLC memory was compressed
or the absolute location of the BEDB and/or DATDB data blocks was changed. The absolute ad-
dresses are no longer correct. A RESET command must be started.
H1 21 This message tells the user that only a RESET command is permitted as the next command. All
other commands will be rejected.
H1 22 The ASM 401 (page frame memory) cannot be accessed (only for FB 231 and PLC 135U). This is a
plug problem (i.e., hardware error) or a parameterization error (FB parameter SSNR and/or KAN).
Check switch settings, and then start a RESET command.
H0 25 QUEUE-READ: QUDBTYP or QUANZ parameter is not permitted.
H0 26 QUEUE-READ: DB or DX from the specified DB/DX area does not exist on the PLC.
H0 27 QUEUE-READ: QUDW pointer is located outside the DB or DX specified in QUDB.
H0 28 QUEUE-READ: DB or DX are missing on the PLC or are too short to read in the user data.
H1 30 FB 230 has found a system error. The acknowledgment of the filehandler or PROFIBUS DP master
is not permitted.
SContact problem of the CM 423 channel module in the ASM 401
SContact problems of the ASM 401 in the backplane bus of the S5
SStatic charging on the SLG cable
SConfiguration not grounded or poorly grounded
SA RESET command must then be started.
SFC 46/56: Communication blocks SFC 58/59 have reported an error. The exact cause is located
in a separate data word (FC 46 = ANZ2; FC 56 = error_BUS).
H1 31 The parameterized channel number (MOBY DB) is outside the legal area (1 to 8).
H1 32 ASM doesn’t react to startup procedure.
This error is reported when the ASM doesn’t react when the FC sets the startup bit and this makes the
handshake procedure during the RESET fail.
Error bit and ready bit are set and the command is terminated.
H1 33 Timeout for init_RUN
If the init_RUN procedure is not concluded within a parameterizable time (e.g., due to an error on the
ASM), this is reported to the user with error H1 33.
Error bit and ready bit are set and the command is terminated.
H1 34 init_RUN executed more than once
The user sets the init_RUN bit again while an init_RUN is already running without waiting for the
ready bit. The FC recognizes this and reports this error.
Error bit and ready bit are set and the command is terminated.
Error Messa
g
es
B-22 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table B-7 Filehandler error messages
ASCII
Error Code
Description
H1 35 ASM_Fehler
When the FC ”realizes” that the ASM can no longer be addressed (reported by OB 122), the com-
mand is terminated, the error bit and ready bit are set and error H1 35 is reported. The failure can
have various causes.
– Voltage failure on the ASM
– Bus plug disconnected or bus cable interrupted
H1 36 SThe DB of the pointer ”command_DB_number” doesn’t exist on the SIMATIC.
SThe ”command_DB” on the SIMATIC is too small (minimum of 30 bytes).
H1 37 Parameter error in MOBY_mode
The MOBY_mode parameter is checked each time the FC is called. When a value larger than 0Fhex
is set, PC processing is terminated and error H1 37 is entered in the MOBY DB.
Error bit and ready bit are set.
H1 38 ANW outside permissible area (0 to 7)
H1 39 There is a gap between two consecutive acknowledgments. The telegram counter DBN indicates to
the FC that acknowledgments have been lost.
H1 40 DBN is greater than ADB.
Kx xx QUEUE-WRITE was parameterized incorrectly (DATDB/DATDW or DLNG).
Option 0000 hex: The file entry parameterized in DATDB with the number xxx or
xxx +1 is not correct. Counting of the file entries in DATDB
starts with 1.
Option 0001 hex: The file entry parameterized in DATDB with the number xxx or
xxx +1 contains a file name which already exists on the MDS.
Counting of the file entries in DATDB starts with 1.
Note
The file entries are incremented decimally.
Error Messa
g
es
C-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
ASCII Table C
C-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
A
SCII Table
D-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Compatibility
The following table provides customers and service personnel with a list of
all types of MDSs, SLGs and ASMs from the MOBY I family. These type
designators are also used on the name plates of the components. When types
have been discontinued, this table can be used to look for a suitable replace-
ment.
Table D-1 Compatibility of MDS and SLG types (status: September 2004)
Type Designator Description/Remarks Replacement Type
MDS 114 1
MDS 115 1
MDS 115-ZA22 3
MDS 115-ZA24 1
MDS 213 E 1
MDS 213 E-ZA223
MDS 302 1
MDS 401
MDS 402
MDS 403
MDS 404
MDS 407 E 1
MDS 413 E 1
MDS 438 E 2
MDS 439 E
MDS 505 1
MDS 506
MDS 507
MDS 514
MDS 515 1
Discontinued on 12.31.2000
Replacement type has different housing with same moun-
ting dimensions
MDS 115 for Ex zone. No CE. Discontinued as of
01.01.96.
The MDS has no cover and is not welded.
Discontinued
MDS 213 E for Ex zone. No CE. Discontinued as of
01.01.96.
Replacement type has 8-KB memory.
8-KB RAM/FRAM
Replacement type delivered with larger RAM memory.
The data are lost when the battery is replaced.
Replacement type with FRAM
MDS 439 E is smaller than MDS 438 E and requires a
different mounting plate. The mounting holes are different
for the user.
Order numbers 6GT2 000-0CD30-0AB0 and
6GT2 000-0CD30-0AC0 are compatible for the user.
Greater temperature range. Temperatures up to 85° C pos-
sible.
Discontinued as of 10.01.2003
Different housing with same mounting dimensions
MDS 404
MDS 404
MDS 404
MDS 404
MDS 402
MDS 507
MDS 404
MDS 439 E
MDS 514
MDS 514
D
D-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Table D-1 Compatibility of MDS and SLG types (status: September 2004)
Type Designator Replacement TypeDescription/Remarks
SLG 40
SLG 40-S
SLG 41
SLG 41-S
SLG 41C
SLG 41CC
SLG 42
SLG 42-ZA22 3
SLG 43
SLG 44 1
SLG 44-ZA28 1
SLG 44-ZA30 1
SLG 44-ZA07
SLG 44
(6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0)
Read head with diameter of M30
Read head with diameter of M18
SLG 41 with turned antenna. As of 10.01.2004 the orde-
ring number was changed from 6GT2 001-0AA00-ZA23
to 6GT2 001-0AA00-0AX0
SLG 42 with smaller range for Ex zone. No CE. Disconti-
nued as of 01.01.96.
Discontinued with effect from October 1, 2003
SLG 44 with wider range (1 m)
SLG 44 with adjustable receiving sensitivity
SLG 44 with adjustable range
SLG 44 with adjustable range, 100% identical with
SLG 44-ZA07 (August 2004)
SLG 44-ZA07
SLG 44-ZA07
SLG 44-ZA07
6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0
ASM 400
ASM 401
ASM 410
ASM 420
ASM 421
ASM 424
ASM 440
ASM 441
ASM 450
ASM 451 1
ASM 452
ASM 454
ASM 456
ASM 470
ASM 473 2
(6GT2 002-0HA00)
ASM 475 2
(6GT2 002-0GA00)
RF170C
SIM
Phased-out with effect from October 1, 2004
Phased-out with effect from October 1, 2004
Phased-out with effect from October 1, 2004
Replacement type SIM is protocol-compatible; ASM is
compatible with SLG connection.
Discontinued as of 07.01.2002. No replacement with serial
interface.
Successor type uses same FB 240. The GSD file is new as
well as mechanics and plug.
Replacement type is PROFIBUS DPV1and not PROFI-
BUS-FMS.
Discontinued with effect from July 1, 2002
Discontinued with effect from July 1, 2002
Replacement type is FC-compatible.
Discontinued with effect from July 1, 2002
Replacement type is FC-compatible.
New HW parameterization necessary.
SIM/ASM 424
ASM 450
ASM 452
ASM 456
ASM 456
ASM 456
ASM 473
(6GT2 002-0HA10)
ASM 475
(6GT2 002-0GA10)
1 Discontinued. Replacement type is 100% compatible.
2 Discontinued. Replacement type is somewhat compatible.
3 Discontinued. No replacement type
Com
p
atibilit
y
Index-1
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Index
Numbers
3RX9 802-0AA0, 6-28
3SX6 284, 5-3
6AW5 418-4F, 6-64
6AW5 451-....3, 7-16
6AW5 451-8AU, 7-16
6EP1 332-1SH12, 6-63
6ES5 491-0LB11, 6-14
6ES5 700-8MA11, 6-19
6ES5 700-8MA22, 6-19
6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0, 6-28
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0, 6-28
6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0, 6-57
6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0, 6-46, 6-47
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0, 6-46, 6-47
6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0, 6-47, 6-52
6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0, 6-39, 6-41
6GT2 000-0CA10, 4-4
6GT2 000-0CA20, 4-8
6GT2 000-0CD30-0AD0, 4-26
6GT2 000-0DC00-0AA0, 4-18
6GT2 000-0DC01-0AA0, 4-21
6GT2 000-0DG10, 4-24
6GT2 000-0EG00, 4-16
6GT2 000-1CF00, 4-11
6GT2 001-0AA00, 5-11
6GT2 001-0AA00-0AX0, 5-11
6GT2 001-0AC00, 5-15
6GT2 001-0AC00-0AX0, 5-15
6GT2 001-0BA00, 5-21
6GT2 001-0CA10, 5-25
6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0, 5-29
6GT2 001-0EA10, 5-3
6GT2 001-0EB00, 5-7
6GT2 002-0AA00, 6-6
6GT2 002-0AB00, 6-6
6GT2 002-0BA00, 6-19
6GT2 002-0EB00, 6-28
6GT2 002-0EB20, 6-28
6GT2 002-0FA10, 6-47
6GT2 002-0GA10, 6-47
6GT2 002-0HA10, 6-56
6GT2 002-1AB00, 6-6
6GT2 002-2CE00, 6-39
6GT2 002-2EE00, 6-39
6GT2 003-0CA00, 7-11
6GT2 003-1CA00, 7-11
6GT2 005-0AA10, 6-64
6GT2 005-0BA10, 6-64
6GT2 005-0CA10, 6-64
6GT2 080-2AA10, 6-6, 6-28, 6-39, 6-47, 6-56,
6-64, 7-3
6GT2 090-0A..., 3-80, 5-15, 6-32
6GT2 090-0AN50, 3-88
6GT2 090-0AT12, 3-88
6GT2 090-0AT80, 3-88
6GT2 090-0BA00, 3-83
6GT2 090-0BA10, 3-83
6GT2 090-0BB00, 6-6, 6-10
6GT2 090-0BB10, 6-6
6GT2 090-0BC00, 5-15, 6-28, 6-32, 6-56
6GT2 090-0CA10, 4-16, 4-24
6GT2 090-0PA00, 4-21
6GT2 090-0QA00, 4-26, 4-28
6GT2 090-0QB00, 4-26, 4-28
6GT2 090-0UA00, 3-83
6GT2 091-0A..., 3-84, 6-6, 6-39, 6-41
6GT2 091-0AH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-0AN10, 3-87
6GT2 091-0AN20, 3-87
6GT2 091-0AN50, 3-87
6GT2 091-0CH20, 3-88
6GT2 091-0CH50, 3-88
6GT2 091-0D..., 3-85, 6-19, 6-25
6GT2 091-0DH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-0DN10, 3-87
6GT2 091-0DN20, 3-87
6GT2 091-0E..., 3-85, 6-46, 6-47, 6-52
6GT2 091-0EH20, 3-87
6GT2 091-0EH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-0EN10, 3-87
6GT2 091-0EN20, 3-87
6GT2 091-0EN50, 3-87
6GT2 091-1CH20, 3-84, 3-88, 6-28, 6-32, 6-56
6GT2 091-1CH50, 3-88
6GT2 091-1CN10, 3-88
6GT2 091-1CN20, 3-88
6GT2 091-1CN50, 3-88
6GT2 091-2A..., 3-84
6GT2 091-2AN10, 3-87
Index-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
6GT2 091-2AN50, 3-87
6GT2 091-2CH20, 3-88
6GT2 091-2D..., 3-85
6GT2 091-2DH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-2E.., 3-85
6GT2 091-2EH20, 3-87
6GT2 091-2EH50, 3-87
6GT2 091-2EN10, 3-87
6GT2 091-2EN50, 3-87
6GT2 094-0AA0, 4-21
6GT2 094-0AB00, 7-11
6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA1, 4-26
6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA2, 4-26
6GT2 303-1CA00, 7-11
6GT2 303-1DA00, 7-11
6GT2 381-1AB00, 7-11
6GT2 390-0BA00, 6-39
6GT2 390-1AB00, 6-39
6GT2 391-0B..., 3-86, 6-39, 6-41
6GT2 391-0BH50, 3-88
6GT2 391-0BN20, 3-88
6GT2 491-1HH50, 6-39, 6-41, 7-4
6GT2 494-0AA00, 3-81, 6-39, 7-4
A
Acquisition Station ES 030-K
Features/layout, 7-14
Ordering data, 7-16
Technical data, 7-17
Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mounting,
6-44
Amount of data, Transferred based on MDS
speed, 3-20
ASM 400
Address settings, 6-11
Function block FB 250, 6-8
Layout and function, 6-4
Ordering data, 6-6
Plug connectors and their assignment, 6-10
Settings on the channel module, 6-13
SIMATIC adapter capsule, 6-14
SIMATIC S5 Configuration, 6-14
Switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-11
Technical data, 6-7
ASM 401
Address settings, 6-11
Function block FB 230, 6-9
Layout and function, 6-4
Ordering data, 6-6
Plug connectors and their assignment, 6-10
Settings on the channel module, 6-13
SIMATIC adapter capsule, 6-14
SIMATIC S5 Configuration, 6-14
Switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-11
Technical data, 6-7
ASM 410
Configuration in ET 100U/ET 200U, 6-21
Layout and function, 6-18
Ordering data, 6-19
Setting the operating mode, 6-23
Slots in PLC, 6-20
Technical data, 6-19
Wiring of one or two SLGs, 6-25
ASM 424
Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mount-
ing, 6-44
Dimensions, 6-44
Layout and function, 6-38
Ordering data, 6-39
Pin assignment and switches, 6-42
Technical data, 6-40
ASM 450
Dimensions, 6-34
Layout and function, 6-26
Ordering data, 6-28
Pin allocation, 6-35
PROFIBUS address and terminating resist-
ance, 6-37
PROFIBUS configuration, 6-31
SLG connection technique, 6-31
Technical data, 6-29
Index
Index-3
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
ASM 452
Dimensions, 6-34
Layout and function, 6-27
Operating mode, 6-31
Ordering data, 6-28
Pin allocation, 6-35
PROFIBUS address and terminating resist-
ance, 6-37
PROFIBUS configuration, 6-31
SLG connection technique, 6-31
Technical data, 6-29
ASM 454
Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mount-
ing, 6-44
Dimensions, 6-44
Layout and function, 6-38
Ordering data, 6-39
Pin assignment and switches, 6-42
Technical data, 6-40
ASM 470
Installation of the software, 6-53
Layout and function, 6-45
Ordering data, 6-47
Technical data, 6-48
Wiring to the SLG, 6-52
ASM 473
Configuration, 6-58
Dimensions, 6-62
Hardware configuration, 6-60
Layout and function, 6-55
Ordering data, 6-56
Pin assignment, 6-61
SLG connection, 6-60
Technical data, 6-56
ASM 475
Installation of the software, 6-53
Layout and function, 6-46
Ordering data, 6-47
Technical data, 6-48
Wiring to the SLG, 6-52
C
Cable, Shielding, 3-74
Cable configuration, 3-80
Cable Lengths, 3-87
Chemical resistance of the mobile data carriers,
3-33
Communication
Between ASM and User Program, 3-11
Between ASM, SLG and MDS, 3-8
Concept of shielding, 3-78
D
Documentation
Manuals, A-1
Operator control guides, A-1
Technical descriptions, A-1
E
EMC basic rules, 3-76
EMC guidelines, 3-62
Avoiding interference sources, 3-70
Equipotential bonding, 3-71
F
Field data, 3-15
L
LEDs for MOBY, 6-61
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP, 6-61
M
MDS 401
Definition of the field midpoints, 4-7
Dimensions, 4-5
Field data, 4-5
Mounting methods, 4-6
Mounting on metal, 4-5
Ordering data, 4-4
Technical data, 4-4
MDS 402
Definition of the field midpoints, 4-10
Dimensions, 4-9
Field data, 4-9
Ordering data, 4-8
Technical data, 4-8
MDS 403
Auxiliary lobes, 4-15
Dimensions, 4-13
Field data, 4-12
Ordering data, 4-11
Technical data, 4-11
Transmission window, 4-14
MDS 404
Dimensions, 4-17
Field data, 4-17
Ordering data, 4-16
Technical data, 4-16
Index
Index-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
MDS 439 E
Cyclic operation, 4-30
Dimensions, 4-28
Field data, 4-27
Life span, 3-61
Ordering data, 4-26
Technical data, 4-26
Temperature dependency of the transmission
window, 3-56
Temperatures during cyclic operation, 3-58
MDS 506
Dimensions, 4-19
Field data, 4-19
Ordering data, 4-18
Technical data, 4-18
MDS 507
Changing the battery, 3-48
Dead battery measurement, 3-48
Dimensions, 4-23
Field data, 4-22
Ordering data, 4-21
Technical data, 4-21
MDS 514
Dimensions, 4-25
Field data, 4-25
Ordering data, 4-24
Technical data, 4-24
Metal-free area, 3-23
Flush installation in metal, 3-24
Mounting on metal, 3-23
MOBY hand-held terminal
Filehandler functions, 7-8
Hardware, 7-10
Ordering data, 7-11
Setup and function, 7-7
System prerequisites, 7-9
Technical data, 7-11
MOBY I dialog, 3-17
MOBY wide-range power supply
Connector assignment 24 V output, 7-5
Dimensions, 7-6
Ordering data, 7-4
Technical data, 7-4
P
Plug connector assignment, 3-82
Presence check, 3-36
Function, 3-36
Parameterization of the MDS 507, 3-39
S
SIM
Dimensions, 6-67
Field data, 6-66
Layout and function, 6-63
Metal-free space, 6-66
Minimum distance, 6-66
Ordering data, 6-64
Plug connector assignment, 6-68
Technical data, 6-65
Transmission window, 6-67
SLG 40
Definition of distance D, 5-6
Dimensions, 5-6
Field data, 5-4
Metal-free space, 5-5
Mounting clamp, 5-5
Ordering data, 5-3
Technical data, 5-3
Transmission window, 5-5
SLG 40-S
Definition of distance D, 5-9
Dimensions, 5-10
Field data, 5-8
Metal-free space, 5-9
Ordering data, 5-7
Technical data, 5-7
Transmission window, 5-9
SLG 41
Definition of distance D, 5-13
Dimensions, 5-14
Field data, 5-12
Metal-free space, 5-13
Ordering data, 5-11
Read head changes, 5-14
Technical data, 5-11
Transmission window, 5-13
SLG 41-S
Definition of distance D, 5-13
Dimensions, 5-14
Field data, 5-12
Metal-free space, 5-13
Ordering data, 5-11
Read head changes, 5-14
Technical data, 5-11
Transmission window, 5-13
Index
Index-5
MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
SLG 41C
Definition of distance D, 5-19
Dimensions, 5-20
Field data, 5-17
Metal-free space, 5-19
Ordering data, 5-15
Technical data, 5-15
Transmission window, 5-18
SLG 41CC
Definition of distance D, 5-19
Dimensions, 5-20
Field data, 5-17
Metal-free space, 5-19
Ordering data, 5-15
Technical data, 5-15
Transmission window, 5-18
SLG 42
Definition of distance D, 5-23
Dimensions, 5-24
Field data, 5-22
Metal-free space, 5-23
Ordering data, 5-21
Technical data, 5-21
Transmission window, 5-23
SLG 43
Definition of distance D, 5-28
Dimensions, 5-28
Field data, 5-26
Metal-free space, 5-27
Ordering data, 5-25
Technical data, 5-25
Transmission window, 5-27
SLG 44
Definition of distance D, 5-32
Dimensions, 5-33
Field data, 5-31
Metal-free space, 5-32
Ordering data, 5-29
Reducing the receiving capacity, 3-52
Reduction of the strength of the sending
field, 3-53
Technical data, 5-30
Transmission window, 5-31
Software MOBY, 7-2
Ordering data, 7-3
Supplementary power pack for SLG, 3-81
T
Transmission window, 3-3
Between MDS 507 and SLG 44, 3-41
Effects of metal, 3-25
Reduction of Metallic Effects, 3-28
Using side lobes, 3-32
Transmit Period of the MDS, 3-7
Index
Index-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
(4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618
Index
TO:
Siemens AG
A&D SE EM MS
PO Box 2355
D–90713 Fuerth
FROM:
Your name: ______________________________
Your title: ______________________________
Your company: ______________________________
Street: _____________________________
City: ______________________________
Telephone:______________________________
Please tick your branch.
rAutomotive industry
rChemical industry
rElectrical industry
rFoodstuffs
rProcess control technology
rMechanical engineering
rPetrochemistry
rPharmaceutics industry
rPlastics processing
rPaper industry
rTextiles industry
rTransportation industry
rOther _____________
If you encountered concrete problems, please use this space to explain.
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
Remarks/Suggestions
Your remarks and suggestions help us to improve the quality of our documentation. Please
complete this questionnaire as soon as you have time, and return it to Siemens.
Title of your manual:____________________________
Order number of your manual:_______________________
Please enter your personal evaluation from 1 (good) to 5 (poor).
1. Do the contents of this manual meet your requirements ?
2. Is it easy to find the information you need ?
3. Is the information written in an easy-to-understand manner ?
4. Does the amount of technical detail meet your requirements ?
5. What is your opinion of the figures and tables ?
